JP2015116262A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine preventing a privilege to be given to a player from becoming monotonous.SOLUTION: A sub-CPU 402, in the state where information related to Character A is stored in a character information storage area provided in a sub-RAM 405, deletes the information related to the Character A, when information related to Character B is stored, and controls to store information related to Character F. Thereby, a game machine which prevents a privilege to be given to a player from becoming monotonous can be provided.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Conventionally, a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols drawn on the peripheral surface, and a display window for displaying a part of the symbols drawn on the peripheral surfaces of the plurality of reels, the game value such as a medal by the player A gaming machine (a so-called “pachi-slot”) in which symbols are stopped and displayed on the display window by rotating all reels based on the loading operation and starting operation on the start lever, and stopping each reel based on the stop button operation by the player. )It has been known. Such a gaming machine is a player when a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on a predetermined line (hereinafter referred to as “effective line”) among symbols displayed on the display window. A privilege (for example, a medal) is given to.

  Further, such a gaming machine detects the operation of the start lever by the player, extracts a predetermined random number value based on the detection of the operation of the start lever, and draws the extracted random number value for each role. Based on the internal lottery table in which the values are specified, it is determined whether or not it is allowed to have a combination of symbols corresponding to the combination (hereinafter referred to as “internal lottery”), and the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination is determined. The reels are controlled to stop based on the combination that is allowed to be aligned on the effective line (hereinafter referred to as “winning combination”) and the player's stop button operation, and the combination of symbols related to the winning combination is displayed on the effective line. To stop display.

  At this time, if no winning combination is won in the internal lottery (that is, “losing”), the combination of symbols related to the winning combination is displayed no matter what timing the stop button is operated. Not. In addition, depending on the combination determined as the winning combination, if the stop button is not operated at an appropriate timing, the combination of symbols related to the combination will not be stopped on the active line, or the stop button is operated at any timing The combination of symbols related to the combination is stopped and displayed on the active line even if the operation is performed. Furthermore, depending on the combination determined as the winning combination, there is a combination in which a combination of symbols related to the combination is not displayed unless the operation sequence of the plurality of stop buttons is an appropriate operation sequence.

  In other words, if the winning combination is determined to be a winning combination where the combination of symbols related to the winning combination is not displayed on the active line unless the stop button is operated in the appropriate operation order, the appropriate timing is determined. In addition, since a stop operation in an appropriate operation order is required, the player is required to have a certain skill regarding the operation of the stop button.

  Further, in such a gaming machine, when a combination of specific symbols is stopped and displayed on the active line, the game machine shifts to a relatively advantageous state (hereinafter referred to as “specific state”) for the player. Is done. Here, the specific state is a bonus (“RB (Regular Bonus)”, “BB (Big Bonus)”, “CB (Challenge Bonus)”) that improves the probability that the winning combination is determined as a winning combination. "MB (Middle Bonus)" etc.) and the combination of symbols related to the winning combination will not be displayed unless the stop button is operated in the proper operation order (or if multiple winning combinations are winning simultaneously, Assist time (hereinafter referred to as “AT”) in which an appropriate stop button operation order is notified when a specific winning combination is determined) A replay that increases the probability that a replay that is allowed to start a game is determined as a winning combination by operating the start lever without performing a game value input operation. Time (hereinafter also referred to as "RT"), assist replay time that AT and RT is activated at the same time there is a (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "ART"), and the like. Therefore, the player plays the game while desiring to shift to a relatively advantageous state for the player.

  2. Description of the Related Art Recently, a gaming machine in which a privilege is defined according to a character and an acquired character is displayed on a liquid crystal display device is known (for example, Patent Document 1). Such a gaming machine displays the number of acquired characters on the liquid crystal display device, and determines the number of games that the player has an advantage based on the acquired characters when the bonus is won. Thereby, since the privilege given according to the acquired character changes, since a player will play a game paying attention to the character to acquire, the interest with respect to a game improves.

JP 2010-115552 A

  However, such a gaming machine has a problem that the privilege to be given to the player is monotonous because the privilege according to the character is different only in the number of games that is advantageous to the player.

  In view of such problems, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which a privilege given to a player does not become monotonous.

  In order to solve such a problem, the gaming machine according to the present invention determines a privilege provision means in which a plurality of benefits are prescribed, and the privilege to be given to a player based on the privilege provision means. A privilege determining unit, a privilege storage unit that stores the privilege determined by the privilege determination unit, and a privilege that grants the privilege to a player based on the privilege stored in the privilege storage unit Providing means, and in the state where the first privilege is stored by the privilege storage means, the privilege determining means as the privilege to be given to the player by the privilege determining means. When a second privilege different from the first privilege is determined, a third privilege different from the first privilege and the second privilege is determined, and the privilege storage means is The third Based on the award is determined, and to store the third benefits.

  Here, the “privilege” may be any privilege as long as it is given to the player more advantageously than when it is not given. For example, (a) operating an ART or AT, (b) shifting to a state in which the ART or AT is operated with a high probability, and (c) increasing the number of games that can be played in the ART or AT. (D) Increase the number of games that can be played in ART or AT with a high probability, (e) Transition to an added state in which the number of games that can be played in ART or AT is added over a plurality of games, ( f) It is possible to apply high-probability transition to an added state in which the number of games that can be played in ART or AT is added over a plurality of games.

  Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention is based on the fact that the symbol display means for variably displaying and stopping a plurality of symbols, the start operation detecting means for detecting the start operation by the player, and the start operation is detected. A winning combination determining means for determining a winning combination, wherein the bonus determining means, when a specific winning combination is determined by the winning combination determining means, based on the bonus defining means, The above-mentioned privilege to be granted is determined.

  Here, the “specific winning combination” may be any winning combination. For example, (a) a predetermined winning combination may be used, or (b) a winning combination determined by lottery may be used.

  The privilege determination means may determine a privilege based on (a) winning a specific winning combination “1”, or (b) based on winning a specific winning combination multiple times. Then, the privilege may be determined, or (c) the privilege may be determined based on the fact that a specific winning combination is continuously won a plurality of times.

  Further, (a) when a specific winning combination is determined by the winning combination determining means, the privilege determining means always determines a privilege to be given to the player, and grants the privilege by the privilege providing means. (B) When a specific winning combination is determined by the winning combination determining means, the privilege determining means determines whether to give a privilege to be given to the player, and a privilege to be given to the player May be determined by lottery, and the privilege determined by the lottery may be granted by the privilege granting means.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which a privilege given to a player does not become monotonous.

It is a figure which shows an example of the front view of a gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal structure of a cabinet. It is a figure which shows an example of the back surface of a front door. It is a figure which shows an example of the block diagram of the whole gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a symbol arrangement | positioning table. It is a figure which shows an example of a design code table. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in case a symbol combination group is "01". It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in case a symbol combination group is "02". It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in case a symbol combination group is "03". It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in case a symbol combination group is "04". It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in case a symbol combination group is "05". It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in case a symbol combination group is "06". It is a figure which shows an example of a game state transition diagram. It is a figure which shows an example of the relationship of a winning area, the operation order of a stop button, and winning a prize. It is a figure which shows an example of the winning area determination table for RT0. It is a figure which shows an example of the winning area determination table for RT1. It is a figure which shows an example of stop table selection table AG. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop table selection tables H-N. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop table selection table OT. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop table selection table U-AA. It is a figure which shows an example of stop table selection table AB-AI. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop table selection table AJ. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop table for left reels. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop table for middle reels. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop table for right reels. It is a figure which shows the list of the states managed by a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the transition diagram of the state managed by a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect determination table for start lever operation. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect determination table for all reels stop. It is a figure which shows an example of the Bonus preparation state transfer lottery table for normal states. It is a figure which shows an example of the Bonus preparation state transfer lottery table for chance states. It is a figure which shows an example of an addition state B transfer lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of a character acquisition lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of the map creation table for normal states. It is a figure which shows an example of the map creation table for chance states. It is a figure which shows an example of the map creation table for AT state. It is a figure which shows an example of the map creation table for the addition state A. It is a figure which shows an example of a stage lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table at the time of chance mass stop. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for battle | competition mass stop. It is a figure which shows an example of the characteristic list of a character. It is a figure which shows an example of a Bonus state game number counter addition lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of an AT state game number counter addition lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of the program start process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the main loop process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the start lever check process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol code setting process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel rotation start preparation process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the process during reel rotation in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the display determination process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the game state transfer process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the process during MB operation | movement in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the process at the time of MB action | operation in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the interruption process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the main process in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the main board | substrate communication process in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the command analysis process in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process at the time of the reel rotation start reception command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for normal states in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for chance states in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for Bonus states in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the character acquisition lottery process in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows the character merge process in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows the process for AT states in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows the process for the addition state A in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows the process for the addition state B in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for Bonus preparation states in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process at the time of the display determination command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the state transfer process in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process at the time of the roulette replay display in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the map information creation process in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the map creation process in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process at the time of the battle | competition mass stop in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process at the time of the character acquisition mass stop in a sub-control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows an example of the process at the time of the chance mass stop in a sub-control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows an example of the process at the time of a fixed mass stop in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows an example of the process at the time of the addition mass stop in a sub-control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows an example of the process at the time of the stage transfer mass stop in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows an example of the process at the time of the end mass stop in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows an example of the process at the time of the normal replay display in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process at the time of the blue 7 replay display in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows an example of the process at the time of the red 7 replay display in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows an example of the process at the time of bell winning in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the character memory deletion determination process in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the animation displayed on a liquid crystal display device in a normal state. It is a figure which shows an example of the animation displayed on a liquid crystal display device in a Bonus preparation state. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop aspect of the reel 17 at the time of the blue 7 middle stage uniform replay display. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop aspect of the reel 17 at the time of the red 7 diagonally aligned replay 01 display. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop aspect of the reel 17 at the time of the red 7 diagonally aligned replay 03 display.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Composition of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the present invention will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating an example of a front view of a gaming machine, and FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an example of an internal structure of a cabinet 2. Moreover, FIG. 3 is a figure which shows an example of the back surface of a front door.

(Game machine 1)
The gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment includes a cabinet 2 described later, a front door 3 and the like.

(Cabinet 2, hinge mechanism 2a, front door 3)
The cabinet 2 is a substantially rectangular box and has an opening on the front side. Moreover, the front door 3 is pivotally supported by the hinge mechanism 2a provided on the front left side of the cabinet 2 so that it can be opened and closed.

(Keyhole 4)
The keyhole 4 is provided at the center right side of the front door 3 and is provided for unlocking the front door 3 by a locking device (not shown). Here, when a store clerk or the like of a game store performs maintenance work, changes a set value, or the like, the locking device (not shown) provided on the front door 3 is unlocked. First, a special key (not shown) is inserted into the keyhole 4 of the front door 3 and is unlocked by rotating it by a predetermined angle in the clockwise direction. Next, the front door 3 is opened, and work such as maintenance work and setting value change is performed. When the maintenance work, the change of the set value, etc. are completed, the front door 3 is closed and locked.

(Side lamps 5a, 5b)
The side lamps 5a and 5b are provided at the left and right ends of the front door 3 when viewed from the front, and incorporate high-intensity light emitting diodes. Further, the side lamps 5a and 5b are designed and designed with shapes, colors, patterns, patterns, etc. appealing to the player's vision, and at a predetermined timing such as during an AT state described later, Control to turn on or blink is performed. The side lamps 5a and 5b may be collectively referred to as “side lamp 5”.

(Medal slot 6)
The medal slot 6 is provided on the right side of a cross key 19 to be described later and is provided for a player to insert a medal.

(1BET button 7)
The 1BET button 7 is provided below a start lamp 23 which will be described later, and is provided to use “1” medals among the credited medals for the game.

(MAX-BET button 8)
The MAX-BET button 8 is provided on the right side of the 1BET button 7 when viewed from the front, and among the stored medals, the maximum number of medals that can be used in one game (“1” game) is used for the game. Is provided. Here, in the present embodiment, the maximum value of medals that can be used in one game in the RT0 gaming state or the RT1 gaming state described later is “3”. In the present embodiment, the maximum number of medals that can be used in one game is “2” in the MB gaming state described later. The 1 BET button 7 and the MAX-BET button 8 may be collectively referred to as “BET buttons 7, 8”.

(Checkout button 9)
The settlement button 9 is provided below the 1BET button 7 and is provided for settlement of stored medals among medals acquired by the player. In the present embodiment, the maximum number of medals that can be stored is “50”.

(Start lever 10)
The start lever 10 is provided on the right side of the settlement button 9 when viewed from the front, and is provided for the player to detect a start operation that triggers the start of rotation of the left reel 17a, the middle reel 17b, and the right reel 17c, which will be described later. ing. Here, based on the detection of the start operation by the player, the main control board 300 described later starts processing for obtaining a hard random number and rotation of the left reel 17a, the middle reel 17b, and the right reel 17c described later. Perform the process. Further, the grip ball portion of the start lever 10 is formed of a light-transmitting resin, and a start lever effect lamp 42 described later is built in the grip ball portion. Then, the after-mentioned effect control board 410 performs lighting / flashing control of the start lever effect lamp 42 on the basis that a predetermined condition is satisfied. Thereby, an effect appealing to the player's vision is performed.

(Left stop button 11, middle stop button 12, right stop button 13, stop button unit 14)
The left stop button 11, middle stop button 12, and right stop button 13 are provided on the right side of the start lever 10 as viewed from the front, and are unitized by a stop button unit 14. The left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are provided to detect a stop operation that triggers the player to stop the rotation of the left reel 17a, the middle reel 17b, and the right reel 17c, which will be described later. It has been. The left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 may be collectively referred to as “stop buttons 11, 12, 13”.

(Return button 15)
The return button 15 is provided on the right side of the stop button unit 14 when viewed from the front. The return button 15 is provided to return a jammed medal when a medal inserted into the medal slot 6 is jammed in a selector 16 described later.

(Selector 16)
The selector 16 is provided inside the medal insertion slot 6 and is provided for determining whether or not the material or shape of the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 6 is appropriate. The selector 16 is provided with a medal sensor 16s for detecting the passage of an appropriate medal. When the medal sensor 16s determines that the medal inserted into the medal slot 6 is an appropriate medal, the appropriate medal is guided to the hopper 520 described later by the hopper guide member 522 described later. To do. On the other hand, when the medal sensor 16s determines that the medal inserted into the medal slot 6 is not an appropriate medal, the medal payout port 33, which will be described later, ejects the medal from the medal payout opening 33, which will be described later.

(Left reel 17a, middle reel 17b, right reel 17c, reel unit 17d)
The left reel 17a, the middle reel 17b, and the right reel 17c are provided inside the cabinet 2, and each has a cylindrical structure. Further, a translucent sheet is mounted on the circumferential surface of the cylindrical structure of the left reel 17a, the middle reel 17b, and the right reel 17c, and a plurality of types of symbols are drawn in a row on the sheet. Yes. The left reel 17a, the middle reel 17b, and the right reel 17c are rotationally driven by exciting stepping motors 101, 102, and 103 which will be described later, and a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed. In the present embodiment, the left reel 17a, middle reel 17b, and right reel 17c are unitized by a reel unit 17d, and the left reel 17a, middle reel 17b, and right reel 17c are attached to and detached from the gaming machine 1. Is easy. The left reel 17a, the middle reel 17b, and the right reel 17c may be collectively referred to as “reel 17”.

(Direction button 18)
The effect button 18 is provided on the right side of the MAX-BET button 8 when viewed from the front, and is provided for the player to operate at a predetermined timing. The effect button 18 is connected to the effect button detection switch 18sw, and the sub-control board 400 described later provides an effect control board 410 described later when the effect button detection switch 18sw detects the operation of the effect button 18. Then, the liquid crystal display device 46, which will be described later, is controlled. The 1BET button 7 and the MAX-BET button 8 can be shared with the effect button 18 without providing the effect button 18. In this case, the main control board 300 to be described later (a) when the operation of the 1BET button 7 is detected by the 1BET switch 7sw, (b) the operation of the MAX-BET button 8 is detected by the MAX-BET switch 8sw. In this case, control is performed to transmit a predetermined command to a sub-control board 400 described later. The sub control board 400 described later performs control of the liquid crystal display device 46 described later based on the reception of the predetermined command. As a result, there is no need to provide a separate production button 18, and the number of parts can be reduced.

(Cross key 19)
The cross key 19 is provided on the right side of the effect button 18 when viewed from the front, and can be pressed at least in the “2” direction (usually “4” direction), and is provided for the player to operate at a predetermined timing. It has been. The cross key 19 is connected to a cross key detection switch 19sw, and a sub-control board 400 described later provides an effect control board 410 described later when the cross key detection switch 19sw detects an operation of the cross key 19. Then, the liquid crystal display device 46, which will be described later, is controlled.

(Panel 20)
The panel 20 includes a display window 21, production lamps 22a to 22j, a start lamp 23, BET lamps 24a to 24c, a stored number display unit 25, a game state display lamp 26, a payout number display unit 27, a throw-in display unit 28, It comprises a game display lamp 29 and stop operation order display lamps 30a to 30c.

(Display window 21)
The display window 21 is provided in the center portion of the panel 20 so as to make the reel 17 visible. Specifically, the pattern drawn on the peripheral surface of the reel 17 is made visible by transmitting the area corresponding to the display window 21 in the panel 20.

(Direction lamps 22a-22j)
The effect lamps 22a to 22j are provided on the back side of the transmissive portions at the left and right ends of the panel 20, and emit light under a predetermined condition to notify the current state (for example, an AT state described later). Is provided. More specifically, the effect lamps 22 a to 22 e are provided on the left side of the display window 21 in front view, and the effect lamps 22 f to 22 j are provided on the right side of the display window 21 in front view. The effect lamps 22a to 22j may be collectively referred to as “effect lamp 22”.

(Start lamp 23)
The start lamp 23 is provided above the 1BET button 7 and is provided to notify whether or not the start operation of the start lever 10 can be accepted. Specifically, the main control board 300 (a) in the later-described RT0 gaming state or later-described RT1 gaming state, when “3” medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 6, (b) the later-described MB. In the gaming state, when “2” medals are inserted into the medal slot 6, (c) the number of stored medals is “3” or more in the RT0 gaming state described later or the RT1 gaming state described later. In this state, when the number of inserted coins becomes “3” due to the operation of the BET buttons 7 and 8, (d) in the MB gaming state described later, the number of stored medals is “2”. When the number of inserted sheets becomes “2” due to the operation of the BET buttons 7 and 8 in the state of the number of sheets or more, (e) a combination of symbols related to “replay” described later is displayed on the effective line. If By lighting the start lamp 23, performs control for notifying can be accepted to start operation by the start lever 10.

(BET lamps 24a-24c)
The BET lamps 24a to 24c are provided on the right side of the start lamp 23 when viewed from the front, and are provided to notify the number of inserted medals used in the game. Specifically, when the number of medals used for the game is “1”, the BET lamp 24a is turned on, and when the number of medals used for the game is “2”, the BET lamp When 24b is lit and the number of medals used in the game is “3”, the BET lamp 24c is lit. The BET lamps 24a to 24c may be collectively referred to as “BET lamp 24”.

(Storage number indicator 25)
The stored number indicator 25 is provided on the right side of the BET lamp 24 when viewed from the front. Further, the stored number display unit 25 is provided for displaying the number of stored medal medals of the player and stored in the gaming machine 1.

(Game state display lamps 26a and 26b)
The game state display lamps 26 a and 26 b are provided on the right side of the stored number display unit 25 in front view. Further, the gaming state display lamps 26a and 26b are notified of the current gaming state by performing light emission control by the main control board 300. The game state display lamps 26a and 26b may be collectively referred to as “game state display lamps 26”.

(Payout number display 27)
The payout number display device 27 is provided on the right side of the game state display lamp 26b in front view. The payout number display 27 is provided for displaying the payout number of medals to be paid out according to the combination of symbols arranged on the activated line activated by operating the BET buttons 7 and 8. . The payout number display 27 is provided for displaying that the gaming machine 1 is in an error state when the gaming machine 1 is in an error state.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the effective line is a symbol displayed on the middle stage of the left reel 17a among the three symbols of the left reel 17a, the middle reel 17b, and the right reel 17c displayed on the display window 21; Only the “middle line” that connects the symbol displayed in the middle stage of the middle reel 17b and the symbol displayed in the middle stage of the right reel 17c with a straight line is the effective line. The middle line may be simply referred to as “middle stage”.

  It should be noted that a line connecting the symbol displayed at the upper stage of the left reel 17a, the symbol displayed at the upper stage of the middle reel 17b, and the symbol displayed at the upper stage of the right reel 17c is “upper” or “upper line”. May be written. In addition, a line connecting the symbol displayed at the lower stage of the left reel 17a, the symbol displayed at the lower stage of the middle reel 17b, and the symbol displayed at the lower stage of the right reel 17c is a “lower” or “lower line” May be written. Also, a line that connects the symbol displayed at the lower stage of the left reel 17a, the symbol displayed at the middle stage of the middle reel 17b, and the symbol displayed at the upper stage of the right reel 17c with a straight line is “upward to the right” or “right” It may be described as “rising line”. In addition, a line connecting the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 17a, the symbol displayed on the middle stage of the middle reel 17b, and the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the right reel 17c with a straight line is “downward right” or “right It may be described as “falling line”.

(Putable indicator lamp 28)
The insertable display lamp 28 is provided on the right side of the payout number indicator 27 as viewed from the front. Here, the main control board 300, which will be described later, performs control to turn on the insertable display lamp 28 when the medal inserted into the medal slot 6 can be stored. On the other hand, the main control board 300, which will be described later, performs control to turn off the insertable display lamp 28 when the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 6 cannot be stored.

  In this embodiment, since the maximum number of medals that can be stored is “50”, the main control board 300 described later can be inserted when the number of stored medals is less than “50”. Control to turn on the display lamp 28 is performed, and control to turn off the insertable display lamp 28 is performed when the number of stored medals is “50”. Further, when a combination of symbols related to “replay” to be described later is displayed on the active line, control is performed to turn off the enabling display lamp 28.

(Replay display lamp 29)
The replay display lamp 29 is provided below the thrown-in display lamp 28. The replay display lamp 29 is lit when a combination of symbols related to “replay” described later is displayed on the active line. This allows the player to display the symbol combination related to “Replay” on the active line, and allows the player to play the next game without using a medal. Notifying that there is.

(Stop operation order display lamps 30a to 30c)
The stop operation order display lamps 30 a to 30 c are provided below the display window 21. Specifically, the stop operation order display lamp 30a is provided below the left reel 17a, the stop operation order display lamp 30b is provided below the middle reel 17b, and the stop operation order display lamp 30c is , Provided below the right reel 17c. In addition, the stop operation order display lamps 30a to 30c are used to notify the player of the optimal stop operation order of the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 based on the winning area determined by the main control board 300 described later. Is provided. Specifically, when it is the optimal timing to stop the left stop button 11, the stop operation sequence display lamp 30a is turned on or blinked, and the intermediate stop button 12 is stopped at the optimal timing. In some cases, the stop operation sequence display lamp 30b is lit or blinked, and when the right stop button 13 is operated to be stopped at an optimal timing, the stop operation sequence display lamp 30c is lit or blinked to optimize the operation. The stop operation order is notified. The stop operation order display lamps 30a to 30c may be collectively referred to as “stop operation order display lamp 30” in some cases.

(Lumbar panel 31)
The waist panel 31 is provided below the stop button unit 14 and is provided for allowing the player to recognize a model name, a motif, and the like. Specifically, a picture of an appearing character is drawn. In addition, a light (not shown) is provided on the back surface of the waist panel 31. By emitting the light (not shown), the player can easily recognize the model name, the motif, and the like of the gaming machine 1.

(Tray receiving unit 32)
The tray unit 32 is provided below the waist panel 31 and is provided for receiving and storing medals discharged from a medal payout port 33 described later.

(Medal payout exit 33)
The medal payout port 33 is provided to discharge medals paid out by the hopper 520 when the hopper 520 described later is driven when paying out medals based on the combination of symbols displayed on the active line. It has been. Further, when the medal sensor 16s determines that the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 6 is not an appropriate medal, or when a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 6 when the medal insertion acceptance is prohibited. It is provided for discharging medals inserted into the insertion slot 6 to the tray unit 32 via the medal payout opening 33.

  Here, in this embodiment, when the medal insertion acceptance is prohibited, (a) when the left reel 17a, the middle reel 17b, and the right reel 17c are rotating, or (b) a combination of symbols related to “replay” Is displayed on the active line. When the symbol combination related to “Replay” is displayed on the active line, the medal insertion acceptance may be permitted.

(Lower speakers 34a, 34b)
The lower speakers 34a and 34b are provided on both the left and right sides of the medal payout opening 33, and are provided for outputting BGM, sound, sound effects, and the like when performing an effect. The lower speakers 34a and 34b may be collectively referred to as “lower speaker 34”.

(Upper speakers 35a, 35b)
The upper speakers 35a and 35b are provided on both the left and right sides of a liquid crystal display device 46, which will be described later, and are provided for outputting BGM, sound, sound effects, etc. when performing an effect, similar to the lower speaker 34. . The upper speakers 35a and 35b may be collectively referred to as “upper speaker 35”, and the lower speaker 34 and the upper speaker 35 may be collectively referred to as “speakers 34 and 35”.

(Setting display section 36)
The setting display unit 36 is provided for displaying the current setting value. Specifically, when a setting change key (not shown) is inserted into a key hole (not shown) and is rotated by a predetermined angle, the main control board 300 displays the currently set value on the setting display unit 36. I do.

(Setting change button 37)
The setting change button 37 is provided for changing the setting value. Here, the method for changing the setting value is as follows. First, as described above, the setting value that is currently set is displayed by rotating a predetermined angle in a state where a setting changing key (not shown) is inserted into the keyhole. 36. Next, by operating the setting change button 37, the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 36 is switched and displayed. Therefore, the setting change button 37 is pressed until the setting value to be determined is displayed on the setting display unit 36. Repeat the operation. Then, the start lever 10 is operated while the setting value to be determined is displayed on the setting display unit 36. Next, an operation of returning the rotated setting change key to an angle at which it can be inserted and removed is performed. By performing these operations, the set value is changed.

  Here, in this embodiment, when an error occurs in the gaming machine 1, no error release button for releasing the error is provided. For this reason, when an error occurs in the gaming machine 1, the main control board 300 performs control to return from the error state based on the fact that a setting change switch 37sw described later detects an operation of the setting change button 37. That is, in the present embodiment, the setting change button 37 has a function for switching the setting value and a function for returning from the error state.

  In this embodiment, the setting value is set in six stages from “setting 1” to “setting 6”, and the setting change is performed in a state where “1” is displayed on the setting display unit 36. When the button 37 is operated, “2” is displayed on the setting display section 36. Thereafter, every time the setting change button 37 is operated, the set value displayed on the setting display section 36 is added and displayed by “1”. The However, when the setting change button 37 is operated in a state where “6” is displayed on the setting display unit 36, “1” is displayed on the setting display unit 36.

(Liquid crystal display device 46)
The liquid crystal display device 46 is provided above the reel 17 to provide an effect of displaying moving images, still images, and the like. In addition, the liquid crystal display device 46 is provided for notifying information related to the result of an internal lottery process described later, or notifying information necessary for stopping and displaying a combination of symbols related to winning on the active line. It has been. Specifically, the liquid crystal display device 46, like the stop operation order display lamp 30, is based on the winning area determined by the main control board 300, which will be described later, and the optimal stop operation order of the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13. To the player.

(Main control board 300)
The main control board 300 is provided inside the cabinet 2 and above the reel 17, and is provided for controlling the gaming machine 1. Details of the main control board 300 will be described later.

(Sub control board 400)
The sub control board 400 is provided above the back surface of the front door 3 and is provided for controlling the liquid crystal display device 46 and the speakers 34 and 35. Details of the sub control board 400 will be described later.

(Power supply device 510)
The power supply device 510 is provided inside the cabinet 2 and on the left side of a hopper 520 (described later) in front view, and is provided to supply power to the gaming machine 1.

(Hopper 520)
The hopper 520 is provided inside the cabinet 2 and on the right side of the power supply device 510 in front view, and is provided for paying out medals to the player. Further, the hopper 520 is driven and controlled based on a predetermined signal from a main control board 300 described later. The power supply board 500 described later determines whether or not a predetermined number of medals have been discharged by a medal sensor (not shown) provided in the hopper, and determines that a predetermined number of medals have been discharged. Then, a signal indicating that a predetermined number of medals have been paid out is transmitted to the main control board 300. Thereby, the main control board 300 described later can recognize that the payout of a predetermined number of medals has been completed.

(Discharge slit 521)
The discharge slit 521 is provided in the hopper 520 and is provided to discharge medals from the hopper 520.

(Hopper guide member 522)
The hopper guide member 522 is provided to guide the determined medal to the hopper 520 when the medal sensor 16s determines that the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 6 is an appropriate medal. .

(Guide member 523)
The guide member 523 has a foreign object or an appropriate medal when a foreign object is inserted into the medal insertion slot 6 or when the medal sensor 16s determines that the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 6 is not an appropriate medal. It is provided to guide the medal determined to be not to the medal payout exit 33.

(Discharge guide member 524)
The payout guide member 524 is provided to guide the medals discharged from the discharge slit 521 of the hopper 520 to the medal payout outlet 33 side of the tray unit 32.

(Auxiliary storage unit 530)
The auxiliary storage unit 530 is provided to store the overflowing medals when the medals stored in the hopper 520 overflow.

(Block diagram of the entire gaming machine)
Next, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the present invention will be specifically described with reference to FIG.

  In the gaming machine 1, a reel control board 100, a relay board 200, a sub control board 400, and a power supply board 500 are connected to a main control board 300 that controls main operations of the gaming machine 1.

(Main control board 300)
The main control board 300 includes a main CPU 301, a main ROM 302, a main RAM 303, a random number generator 304, and an I / F (interface) circuit 305. The main control board 300 is connected to a setting display section 36, a setting change switch 37sw, and an external concentrated terminal board 38.

(Main CPU 301)
The main CPU 301 reads a program stored in the main ROM 302 and performs predetermined arithmetic processing in accordance with the progress of the game, thereby causing the reel control board 100, the relay board 200, the sub control board 400, and the power supply board 500 to be processed. A predetermined signal is transmitted.

(Main ROM 302)
The main ROM 302 stores a control program executed by the main CPU 301, a data table such as a winning area determination table, data for transmitting a command to the sub control board 400, and the like. Specifically, the main ROM 302 includes a symbol arrangement table (see FIG. 5) described later, a symbol code table (see FIG. 6) described later, a symbol combination table (see FIGS. 7 to 12) described later, and a winning for RT0 described later. Area determination table (see FIG. 15), RT1 winning area determination table described later (see FIG. 16), stop table selection table described later (see FIGS. 17 to 22), and left reel stop table described later (see FIG. 23). In addition, a later-described middle reel stop table (see FIG. 24), a later-described right reel stop table (see FIG. 25), and the like are stored.

(Main RAM 303)
The main RAM 303 is provided with a storage area for storing various data determined by execution of programs by the main CPU 301. Specifically, the main RAM 303 stores (a) an effect transmission data storage area for transmitting a command to a sub-control board 400, which will be described later, and (b) that replaying is in operation. (C) a re-game in-operation flag storage area, (c) a winning area determining random value storage area for storing a random value extracted by a random number generator 304 described later when performing an internal lottery process described later; A game state storage area for storing a game state, (e) a lottery number storage area for storing the number of lotteries when performing an internal lottery process to be described later, and (f) a stepping motor 101, 102, 103 for reels When the stop button 11, 12, 13 is operated in the state in which the stop button 17 is rotated, the pressure reference position storage area for storing the reference pressure position acquired when the stop button 11, 12, 13 is operated. A medal insertion number storage area for storing the number of dal, (h) a winning area storage area for storing information related to a winning area determined by an internal lottery process to be described later, and (i) information winning for an MB over a plurality of games A carry flag storage area for storing, (j) a stop position storage area for storing the stop position of the reel 17, and (k) a payout number counter for counting the number of payouts as an MB game state end condition described later. A storage area is provided.

(Random number generator 304)
The random number generator 304 is provided to generate a random number for determining a winning area or the like. Here, in the present embodiment, the random number generator 304 generates a random value in the range of “0” to “65535”.

(IF circuit 305)
The I / F (interface) circuit 305 is a circuit for transmitting and receiving signals (commands) between the main control board 300, the reel control board 100, the relay board 200, the sub control board 400, and the power supply board 500.

(Setting change switch 37sw)
The setting change switch 37sw is a switch for detecting that the setting change button 37 has been operated. When the setting change button 37 is detected by the setting change switch 37sw in a state where the setting change key (not shown) is inserted into the keyhole and rotated by a predetermined angle, the main CPU 301 displays the setting display. Control to switch and display the set value on the unit 36 is performed.

  Further, the main CPU 301 performs control for returning from the error state based on the detection of the operation of the setting change button 37 by the setting change switch 37sw in the error state.

(External concentration terminal board 38)
The external concentration terminal board 38 is provided inside the gaming machine 1 and, for a hall computer (not shown), (a) a medal insertion signal that can specify the number of medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 6, and (b) a player. Is provided to output a predetermined signal such as a medal payout signal that can specify the number of medals paid out to the player, and (c) a reel rotation start signal that can specify that the rotation of the reel 17 has started.

(Relay board 200)
The relay board 200 includes a 1BET switch 7sw, a MAX-BET switch 8sw, a checkout switch 9sw, a start switch 10sw, a left stop switch 11sw, a middle stop switch 12sw, a right stop switch 13sw, a medal sensor 16s, a start lamp 23, and a BET lamp 24. The stored number display unit 25, the game state display lamp 26, the payout number display unit 27, the insertion possible display lamp 28, the re-game display lamp 29, the selector sensor 39s, the reset key sensor 40s, and the door opening sensor 41s are connected.

(1BET switch 7sw)
The 1BET switch 7sw is a switch for detecting an operation of the 1BET button 7 by the player. In addition, when the operation of the 1BET button 7 by the player is detected by the 1BET switch 7sw, the relay board 200 transmits a predetermined signal to the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. Then, the main CPU 301 performs control to use “1” medals from the medals stored by the player based on the reception of the predetermined signal from the relay board 200.

(MAX-BET switch 8sw)
The MAX-BET switch 8sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the MAX-BET button 8 by the player. Further, when the operation of the MAX-BET button 8 by the player is detected by the MAX-BET switch 8sw, the relay board 200 transmits a predetermined signal to the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. . The main CPU 301 receives “3” medals from the medals stored by the player based on the reception of the predetermined signal from the relay board 200 (“2” in the MB gaming state described later). Perform the control to be used. The 1 BET switch 7sw and the MAX-BET switch 8sw may be collectively referred to as “BET switches 7sw, 8sw”.

(Settlement switch 9sw)
The settlement switch 9sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the settlement button 9 by the player. Further, when an operation of the payment button 9 by the player is detected by the payment switch 9sw, the relay board 200 transmits a predetermined signal to the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. Then, the main CPU 301 outputs a signal indicating that the stored medal is to be returned to the power supply board 500 based on the reception of the predetermined signal from the relay board 200. And the power supply board 500 performs control which returns the medal currently stored by the hopper 520. FIG.

(Start switch 10sw)
The start switch 10sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the start lever 10 by the player. Further, when the start switch 10sw detects the operation of the start lever 10 by the player, the relay board 200 transmits a predetermined signal to the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. Then, the main CPU 301 performs control for starting the rotation of the reel 17 based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the relay board 200.

(Left stop switch 11sw)
The left stop switch 11sw is a switch for detecting an operation of the left stop button 11 by the player. When the operation of the left stop button 11 by the player is detected by the left stop switch 11sw, the relay board 200 transmits a predetermined signal to the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. Then, the main CPU 301 performs control to stop the rotating left reel 17a based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the relay board 200.

(Intermediate stop switch 12sw)
The middle stop switch 12sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the middle stop button 12 by the player. Further, when the operation of the middle stop button 12 by the player is detected by the middle stop switch 12sw, the relay board 200 transmits a predetermined signal to the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. Then, the main CPU 301 performs control to stop the rotating middle reel 17b based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the relay board 200.

(Right stop switch 13sw)
The right stop switch 13sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the right stop button 13 by the player. Further, when the operation of the right stop button 13 by the player is detected by the right stop switch 13sw, the relay board 200 transmits a predetermined signal to the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. Then, the main CPU 301 performs control to stop the rotating right reel 17c based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the relay board 200. The left stop switch 11sw, the middle stop switch 12sw, and the right stop switch 13sw may be collectively referred to as “stop switches 11sw, 12sw, 13sw”.

  In the present embodiment, the stop switches 11sw, 12sw, and 13sw are provided so that the ON / OFF of the operation of the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 can be detected. Therefore, when the stop button 11, 12, 13 is operated by the player (ON edge), and after the player operates the stop button 11, 12, 13, the player's finger moves the stop button 11, 12 , 13 (OFF edge) can be detected.

(Medal sensor 16s)
The medal sensor 16s is a sensor for detecting that an appropriate medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 6. In addition, when the medal sensor 16s detects a normal medal passage, the relay board 200 transmits a predetermined signal to the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. Then, the main CPU 301 performs a process performed when a medal is inserted based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the relay board 200.

(Selector sensor 39s)
The selector sensor 39s is a sensor for detecting fraud. Further, when an illegal act is detected by the selector sensor 39 s, the relay board 200 transmits a predetermined signal to the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. Then, the main CPU 301 performs a process performed when an illegal act is detected based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the relay board 200.

(Reset key sensor 40s)
The reset key sensor 40s is a sensor for detecting that a dedicated key (not shown) is inserted into the keyhole 4 and rotated by a predetermined angle in the counterclockwise direction. When the reset key sensor 40s detects that a dedicated key (not shown) is inserted into the keyhole 4 and is rotated by a predetermined angle in the counterclockwise direction, the relay board 200 is connected to the I of the main control board 300. A predetermined signal is transmitted to the / F circuit 305. Then, the main CPU 301 performs control for returning from the error state based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the relay board 200.

(Door open sensor 41s)
The door opening sensor 41 s is provided on the back side of the keyhole 4 and is a sensor for detecting the opening of the front door 3. In the present embodiment, the door opening sensor 41s includes a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit. When a dedicated key (not shown) is inserted into the keyhole 4 and the dedicated key is rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle, the door opening sensor 41s is illustrated. The locking portion that does not rotate will rotate. And when the said locking part rotates, the light light-emitted from the light emission part does not reach a light-receiving part. Thus, the door opening sensor 41s detects the opening of the front door 3.

(Power supply board 500)
A power supply device 510, a hopper 520, and an auxiliary storage unit full sensor 530s are connected to the power supply substrate 500.

(Power supply device 510)
The power supply device 510 includes a power button 511 and a power switch 511sw.

(Power button 511)
The power button 511 is provided for a store clerk or the like of the game store to perform an operation of supplying power to the gaming machine 1. The power button 511 is connected to a power switch 511sw.

(Power switch 511sw)
The power switch 511sw is a switch for detecting that the power button 511 is operated. Further, power is supplied to the entire gaming machine 1 based on the detection of the operation of the power button 511 by the power switch 511sw.

(Auxiliary storage part full tank sensor 530s)
The auxiliary storage unit full tank sensor 530 s is a sensor for detecting that a predetermined number of medals are stored in the auxiliary storage unit 530. When the auxiliary storage unit full sensor 530 s detects that a predetermined number of medals are stored in the auxiliary storage unit 530, the power supply board 500 is connected to the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. A predetermined signal is output. Then, when the main control board 300 receives a predetermined signal, control is performed to make an error state.

(Reel control board 100)
Stepping motors 101, 102, 103, a left reel sensor 111s, a middle reel sensor 112s, and a right reel sensor 113s are connected to the reel control board 100.

(Stepping motors 101, 102, 103)
Stepping motors 101, 102, and 103 are provided for rotationally driving the reel 17. Further, the stepping motors 101, 102, and 103 have a configuration capable of stopping the rotation shaft at a specified angle. Then, the driving force of the stepping motors 101, 102, 103 is transmitted to the reel 17 through a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio. As a result, the reel 17 rotates at a constant angle each time “1” pulses are output to the stepping motors 101, 102, and 103. The main CPU 301 manages the rotation angle of the reel 17 by counting the number of times pulses are output to the stepping motors 101, 102, 103 after detecting the reel index.

(Left reel sensor 111s)
The left reel sensor 111s is a sensor for detecting a reel index indicating that the left reel 17a has rotated once by an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit.

(Medium reel sensor 112s)
The middle reel sensor 112s is a sensor for detecting a reel index indicating that the middle reel 17b has rotated once by an optical sensor having a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion.

(Right reel sensor 113s)
The right reel sensor 113s is a sensor for detecting a reel index indicating that the right reel 17c has made one rotation by an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit. The left reel sensor 111s, the middle reel sensor 112s, and the right reel sensor 113s may be collectively referred to as “reel sensors 111s, 112s, 113s”.

(Sub control board 400)
The sub-control board 400 is a board mainly for controlling effects. The sub control board 400 includes an I / F (interface) circuit 401, a sub CPU 402, a random number generator 403, a sub ROM 404, a sub RAM 405, and an RTC (Real Time Clock) device 406. Further, the effect button detection switch 18sw, the cross key detection switch 19sw, the effect control board 410, and the amplifier control board 440 are connected to the sub control board 400.

(Production button detection switch 18sw)
The effect button detection switch 18sw is a switch for detecting an operation of the effect button 18 by the player. In addition, when the operation of the effect button 18 by the player is detected by the effect button detection switch 18sw, the sub control board 400 performs control based on the operation of the effect button 18 by the player.

(Cross key detection switch 19sw)
The cross key detection switch 19sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the cross key 19 by the player. When the operation of the cross key 19 by the player is detected by the cross key detection switch 19sw, the sub-control board 400 performs control based on the operation of the cross key 19 by the player.

(I / F circuit 401)
An I / F (interface) circuit 401 is provided to receive a signal from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300.

(Sub CPU 402)
The sub CPU 402 reads an effect program stored in the sub ROM 404 and performs a predetermined calculation based on a command from the main control board 300, an input signal of the effect button detection switch 18sw, and the cross key detection switch 19sw. The calculation result is provided to supply the effect control board 410 and the amplifier control board 440.

(Random number generator 403)
The random number generator 403 is provided to generate a random number used when determining an effect or the like performed by the liquid crystal display device 46, the speakers 34, 35, and the like. The random number generator 403 is provided to generate a random number for determining a lottery for shifting to the Bonus preparation state described later.

(Sub ROM 404)
The sub ROM 404 is a program for executing an effect, an effect determination table for start lever operation described later (see FIG. 28), an effect determination table for all reels stop (described later) (see FIG. 29), and a normal state bonus described later. Preparation state transfer lottery table (see FIG. 30), chance state Bonus preparation state transfer lottery table (see FIG. 31), additional state B transfer lottery table (see FIG. 32), and character acquisition lottery table (see FIG. 30). 33), a map creation table for normal state described later (see FIG. 34), a map creation table for chance state described later (see FIG. 35), a map creation table for AT state described later (see FIG. 36), and an added state described later. A map creation table (see FIG. 37), stage lottery table (see FIG. 38), which will be described later, Chance mark, which will be described later. Stop lottery table (see FIG. 39), battle mass stop lottery table (see FIG. 40), Bonus state game number counter addition lottery table (see FIG. 42), AT state game number counter addition lottery table (see FIG. 42) 43) and the like. The sub ROM 404 is mainly composed of a program storage area and a table storage area.

(Sub RAM 405)
The sub RAM 405 functions as a data work area when the sub CPU 402 performs arithmetic processing. Specifically, there are provided a storage area for storing various data such as a winning area transmitted from the main control board 300, and a storage area for storing the determined contents and effects data. Specifically, in the sub RAM 405, (a) a state number storage area for storing a state managed by the sub control board 400, and (b) an AT for storing the number of games that can be played in the AT state described later. A state game number counter, (c) an additional state B game number counter for storing the number of games that can be played in an added state B, which will be described later, and (d) a number of games that can be played in a bonus state, which will be described later. Bonus state game number counter, (e) Bonus preparation state transition game number counter for storing the number of games until transition to the below-described Bonus preparation state, and (f) Number of sets that can be played in the AT state described later. AT state set number counter for storing, (g) Bell continuous winning flag storage area for storing bell continuous winning flag described later, (h) Character described later Character information storage area for storing information obtained for data A to character H, (i) for updating the current location when a combination of symbols related to “roulette replay” described later is displayed on the active line A progress mass counter, (j) a map information storage area for storing information relating to a square determined by a map creation process described later, (k) a continuous effect counter used when executing a continuous effect, (l) described later Bell consecutive winning counter for counting the number of times that “Bell” has continuously won, (m) Map creation counter used as the number of times to create a square in map creation processing described later, (n) Normal state described later In the stage information storage area for storing information related to the stage, (o) a combination of symbols related to “normal replay” described later is effective. Normal replay achievement counter or the like for counting the number of times displayed on emissions is provided.

(RTC device 406)
The RTC device 406 is provided for counting a predetermined counter value at a counting interval different from a count value counted by a frame counter 425 described later. The RTC device 406 is provided for acquiring the current date and time.

(Production control board 410)
The effect control board 410 is a board mainly for executing effects. The effect control board 410 includes an image control unit 420 and a lamp control unit 430.

(Image control unit 420)
The image control unit 420 is provided to control the display of the liquid crystal display device 46 mainly when performing an effect. The image control unit 420 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor) 421, a liquid crystal control CPU 422, a liquid crystal control ROM 423, a liquid crystal control RAM 424, a frame counter 425, a CGROM (Character Generator Read Only Memory) 426, a VRAM 427, a sound source IC 428, and a sound source ROM 428. Have. Further, the general-purpose board 45 and the lamp control unit 430 are connected to the image control unit 420.

(General purpose board 45)
The general-purpose substrate 45 is provided between the image control unit 420 and the liquid crystal display device 46, and has a bridge function for converting the image data into a predetermined image format when displaying the image data. Further, the general-purpose board 45 has a bridge function for converting into an image format corresponding to the performance of the liquid crystal display device 46 for displaying image data. For example, when a SXGA (1280 dots × 1080 dots) “19” inch liquid crystal display device 46 is connected, and when an XGA (1024 dots × 768 dots) “17” inch liquid crystal display device 46 is connected. Absorb resolution differences.

(VDP421)
The VDP 421 is a so-called image processor, and controls to read image data from the “display frame buffer area” out of the frame buffer areas of the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area based on an instruction from the liquid crystal control CPU 422. Do. Then, based on the read image data, a video signal (for example, an LVDS signal or an RGB signal) is generated and output to the general-purpose substrate 45, thereby performing control of displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 46. The VDP 421 includes a control register (not shown), a CG bus I / F, a CPU I / F, a clock generation circuit, an expansion circuit, a drawing circuit, a display circuit, a memory controller, and the like, which are connected by a bus. .

(Liquid crystal control CPU 422)
The liquid crystal control CPU 422 is provided for creating a display list based on the command received from the sub control board 400 and transmitting the display list to the VDP 421. Further, the liquid crystal control CPU 422 performs control to display the image data stored in the CGROM 426 on the liquid crystal display device 46.

(LCD control ROM 423)
The liquid crystal control ROM 423 is configured by a mask ROM or the like, and includes a control processing program for the liquid crystal control CPU 422, a display list generation program for generating a display list, an animation pattern for displaying an animation of an effect pattern, and animation scene information. Etc. are stored. The animation pattern referred to here is referred to when displaying the animation of the production pattern, and stores a combination of animation scene information included in the production pattern, a display order of each animation scene information, and the like. In the animation scene information, a wait frame (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), parameters (sprite display position, transfer destination address, etc.), drawing method, and effect image are displayed. Information such as information specifying a display device is stored.

(Liquid crystal control RAM 424)
The liquid crystal control RAM 424 is built in the liquid crystal control CPU 422. The liquid crystal control RAM 424 also functions as a data work area when the liquid crystal control CPU 422 performs arithmetic processing, and is provided to temporarily store data read from the liquid crystal control ROM 423.

(Frame counter 425)
The frame counter 425 is provided to receive a power supply from the power supply board 500 and count the frame counter value. The frame counter 425 stops counting the frame counter value when the supply of power from the power supply board 500 is stopped. Then, when the supply of power by the power supply substrate 500 is resumed, the frame counter 425 initializes the frame counter value registered in the register and resumes counting.

(CGROM426)
The CGROM 426 includes a flash memory, an EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory), an EPROM (Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory), a mask ROM, and the like. Further, the CGROM 426 compresses and stores image data (for example, sprites, movies) and the like that are a set of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 pixels × 32 pixels). This pixel information is composed of color number information for designating a color number for each pixel and an α value indicating the transparency of the image. Further, the CGROM 426 performs reading in units of image data by the VDP 421 and performs image processing in units of frame image data. Further, the CGROM 426 stores palette data in which color number information for specifying a color number and display color information for actually displaying colors are associated with each other without being compressed.

  In this embodiment, the CGROM 426 stores palette data in which color number information for specifying a color number and display color information for actually displaying colors are associated with each other without being compressed. Not limited to this, a configuration in which only a part is compressed may be used. As a movie compression method, various compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.

(VRAM427)
The VRAM 427 is configured by an SRAM (Static Random Access Memory). Here, the SRAM is a readable / writable memory and is a kind of volatile memory for temporarily holding data. By configuring the VRAM 427 with SRAM, writing and reading of image data can be processed at high speed. The VRAM 427 includes a memory map including an arbitrary area, a first display list area, a second display list area, a first frame buffer area, and a second frame buffer area.

(Sound source IC428)
The sound source IC 428 is provided for reading a program and data relating to sound from the sound source ROM 429 and generating sound signals for driving the speakers 34 and 35.

(Sound source ROM 429)
The sound source ROM 429 is provided for storing a program and data for executing an effect. Specifically, programs and data related to voice are stored.

(Ramp control unit 430)
The lamp control unit 430 is a board for controlling the side lamp 5, the effect lamp 22, the stop operation order display lamp 30, and the start lever effect lamp 42 mainly when performing an effect. The lamp control unit 430 includes a lamp control CPU 431, a lamp control ROM 432, and a lamp control RAM 433. In addition, the side lamp 5, the effect lamp 22, the stop operation order display lamp 30, the start lever effect lamp 42, and the drive board 43 are connected to the lamp control unit 430.

(Start lever effect lamp 42)
The start lever effect lamp 42 is composed of a high-intensity light-emitting diode, and is provided to perform an effect visually appealing to the player based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied. Here, the lamp control unit 430 controls lighting / flashing of the start lever effect lamp 42 based on the fact that a predetermined condition such as a case where a predetermined winning area is won is satisfied in an internal lottery process described later. I do.

(Drive board 43)
The drive substrate 43 is a substrate for performing control to move the effect device 44. Further, the drive board 43 performs control for moving the effect device 44 based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the lamp control unit 430.

(Directing device 44)
The effect device 44 is provided on the back side of the liquid crystal display device 46. Here, the lamp control unit 430 performs control to move the rendering device 44 to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 46 via the drive substrate 43 based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the sub control substrate 400. Thus, a visual appeal to the player is performed.

(Lamp control CPU 431)
The lamp control CPU 431 reads a program and data relating to light emission of the lamp and LED stored in the lamp control ROM 432, and emits the side lamp 5, the effect lamp 22, the stop operation order display lamp 30, and the start lever effect lamp 42. Is provided for generating a signal. In addition, the lamp control CPU 431 reads a program and data stored in the lamp control ROM 432, generates a signal for performing control to move the effect device 44 and the liquid crystal display device 46, and transmits the signal to the drive board 43. Is provided.

(Lamp control ROM 432)
The lamp control ROM 432 is provided for storing a program and data for executing an effect. Specifically, the lamp control ROM 432 stores programs, data, and the like relating to light emission of the side lamp 5, the effect lamp 22, the stop operation order display lamp 30, and the start lever effect lamp 42. The lamp control ROM 432 stores programs, data, and the like for moving the rendering device 44 and the liquid crystal display device 46 via the drive board 43.

(Ramp control RAM 433)
The lamp control RAM 433 is provided as a temporary storage area when the side lamp 5, the effect lamp 22, the stop operation order display lamp 30, and the start lever effect lamp 42 are controlled to emit light. The lamp control RAM 433 is provided as a temporary storage area when the effect device 44 and the liquid crystal display device 46 are moved via the drive board 43.

(Amplifier control board 440)
The amplifier control board 440 is a board for outputting audio data mainly from the speakers 34 and 35. The amplifier control board is connected to a lower speaker amplifier 441 and an upper speaker amplifier 442.

(Lower speaker amplifier 441)
The lower speaker amplifier 441 is provided to amplify the audio signal from the sound source IC 428 and output it to the lower speaker 34.

(Upper speaker amplifier 442)
The upper speaker amplifier 442 is provided to amplify the audio signal from the sound source IC 428 and output the amplified audio signal to the upper speaker 35.

(Design arrangement table)
Next, the symbol arrangement table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The symbol arrangement table is provided in the main ROM 302. When the main CPU 301 detects the reel index, the symbol position in the middle of the display window 21 is defined as “00”. Further, “00” to “20” corresponding to the symbol counter are assigned to the symbols in the order of the reel rotation direction with reference to the symbol position “00”.

(Design code table)
Next, the symbol code table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The symbol code table stores symbol codes corresponding to symbols arranged on the left reel 17a, middle reel 17b, and right reel 17c, and data corresponding to the symbols. In this embodiment, when the symbol code is “01”, “00000001” is stored as data corresponding to the symbol “Replay”. Similarly, data corresponding to each symbol is stored for symbol codes “02” to “10”.

  Further, the type of the symbol displayed on the display window 21 is specified based on the symbol counter value (“00” to “20”), the symbol arrangement table (see FIG. 5), and the symbol code table. Can do. For example, when the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the left reel 17a is “00”, it may be specified that the symbol “bell” at the symbol position “00” is displayed in the middle of the display window 21. it can. Similarly, when the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the left reel 17a is “00”, it is specified that the symbol “watermelon 2” at the symbol position “01” is displayed in the upper part of the display window 21. It is possible to specify that the symbol “Replay” at symbol position “20” is displayed in the lower part of the display window 21. When the main CPU 301 specifies that the value of the symbol counter is “00” and the symbol “Bell” is displayed, “00000001” is stored as data in a predetermined storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Is stored.

(Design combination table)
Next, the symbol combination table will be described with reference to FIGS.

  The symbol combination table includes a symbol combination table (see FIG. 7) when the symbol combination group is “01”, a symbol combination table (see FIG. 8) when the symbol combination group is “02”, and a symbol combination group “ The symbol combination table (see FIG. 9) in the case of “03”, the symbol combination table in the case of the symbol combination group “04” (see FIG. 10), and the symbol combination table in the case of the symbol combination group “05” (see FIG. 11) and a symbol combination table (see FIG. 12) when the symbol combination group is “06”.

  In addition, the symbol combination table is stored in the main ROM 302 and includes a bit corresponding to the symbol combination, a symbol bit name indicating the name of the bit, a symbol combination predetermined according to the type of privilege, and a payout. The number of sheets is specified. Here, when the combination of symbols displayed along the activated line matches the symbol combination specified in the symbol combination table, the main CPU 301 gives a bonus such as a medal payout and re-game activation. It is given to the person. For example, when the symbol combination “replay”, “replay”, and “bell” is displayed on the effective line, the main CPU 301 determines that the symbol combination related to “normal replay” is displayed. . If the symbol combination displayed on the active line does not match the symbol combination defined in the symbol combination table, the game is “lost”.

  Here, the “payout number” refers to the number of medals to be paid out to the player. When a value of “1” or more is determined as the payout number, medals are paid out. Specifically, medals are paid out when a combination of symbols in which a numerical value of “1” or more is defined as the payout number is displayed on the active line.

  In the present embodiment, “middle bell”, “following role 01-14”, “obliquely aligned bell 01-05”, “obliquely aligned watermelon 01-04”, “upper aligned watermelon 01-08”, “control” The combination of symbols related to “Changing part”, “Corner cherry 01 to 62”, “Middle tier cherry 01 to 06”, “Chance eyes 01 to 07” and “Fixed eyes 01 to 24” is displayed on the active line. Based on this, medals are paid out.

  Here, “middle bell”, “follower role 01-14”, “obliquely aligned bell 01-05”, “diagonally aligned watermelon 01-04”, “upperly aligned watermelon 01-08”, “control changer”, “ The symbol combinations related to “Corner Cherry 01 to 62”, “Middle Cherry 01 to 06”, “Chance Eye 01 to 07”, and “Final Item 01 to 24” are collectively referred to as “Combination of Symbols Related to Winning”. There is a case.

  In addition, “middle bell” and “obliquely aligned bells 01 to 05” may be collectively referred to as “bell” in some cases. In addition, “diagonally aligned watermelons 01 to 04” and “upper aligned watermelons 01 to 08” may be collectively referred to simply as “watermelons”. In addition, “square cherry 01 to 62” and “middle cherry 01 to 06” may be collectively referred to simply as “cherry”. In addition, “chance eyes 01 to 07” may be collectively referred to simply as “chance eyes”. Further, “determined eyes 01 to 24” may be collectively referred to simply as “determined eyes”.

  Further, in the present embodiment, “normal replay”, “roulette replay”, “chance replay”, “red 7 middle row replay 01-04”, “blue 7 middle row replay 01”, “blue 7 roll replay 01-03” "Red 7 diagonally aligned replay 01-03", "White 7 middle level aligned replay 01-02", "White 7 diagonally aligned replay 01-02", "White 7 top level aligned replay 01-03", "White 7 follow When the symbol combination relating to “Replay 01-05” is displayed on the active line, the re-game is activated.

  Here, “normal replay”, “roulette replay”, “chance replay”, “red 7 middle row replay 01-04”, “blue 7 middle row replay 01”, “blue 7 roll replay 01-03”, “red "7 diagonally aligned replays 01 to 03", "White 7 middle level aligned replays 01 to 02", "White 7 diagonally aligned replays 01 to 02", "White 7 top level aligned replays 01 to 03", "White 7 follow replays 01 to 05" "May be collectively referred to as" replay "or" replay ".

  In addition, “red 7 middle stage replay 01-04” may be collectively referred to simply as “red 7 middle stage replay”. In addition, “blue 7 middle stage replay 01” may be collectively referred to simply as “blue 7 replay”. In addition, “blue seven-turn replay 01 to 03” may be collectively referred to as “blue seven-turn replay” in some cases. Further, “red 7 diagonally aligned replays 01 to 03” may be collectively referred to simply as “red 7 diagonally aligned replays”. “Red 7 middle level replay 01-04” and “Red 7 diagonally aligned replay 01-03” may be collectively referred to simply as “red 7 replay”. Further, “white 7 middle stage replay 01-02” may be collectively referred to as “white 7 middle stage replay”. In addition, “white 7 diagonally aligned replays 01 to 02” may be collectively referred to simply as “white 7 diagonally aligned replays”. Further, “white 7 upper stage replay 01 to 03” may be collectively referred to simply as “white 7 upper stage replay”. Further, “White 7 Follow Replay 01-05” may be collectively referred to as “White 7 Follow Replay” in some cases. In addition, “white 7 middle level replay 01-02”, “white 7 diagonally aligned replay 01-02” and “white 7 top level replay 01-03” may be collectively referred to simply as “white 7 replay”. is there.

(Game state transition diagram)
Next, the game state transition diagram will be described with reference to FIG.

  The gaming state transition diagram defines (a) the current gaming state, (b) the gaming state transition condition, and (c) the transition destination gaming state when the gaming state transition condition is satisfied. Here, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 controls the transition of the gaming state from the RT0 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state based on the fact that “MB” is won when the current gaming state is the RT0 gaming state. I do.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is the RT1 gaming state, the main CPU 301 changes the gaming state from the RT1 gaming state to the MB gaming state based on the fact that the symbol combination related to “MB” is displayed on the active line. Control to shift to.

  In addition, when the current gaming state is the MB gaming state, the main CPU 301 performs control to shift the gaming state from the MB gaming state to the RT0 gaming state based on the completion of the MB gaming state termination condition. .

  In the following, the RT0 gaming state may be described as “non-RT gaming state” or “general gaming state”, and the RT1 gaming state may be described as “RT gaming state”.

(Relationship between winning area, stop button operation sequence, winnings, etc.)
Next, based on FIG. 14, the relationship between the winning area, the operation order of the stop button, and winnings will be described.

  The winning area table for RT0 and the winning area table for RT1 described later stored in the main ROM 302 define winning areas of “00” to “34”, but all winning areas in all gaming states. May not be determined.

  For example, in the RT1 gaming state, the “losing” of the winning area “00” may be determined, while in the RT0 gaming state and the MB gaming state, the “losing” of the winning area “00” may be determined. Absent. Further, in the RT1 gaming state, there is a possibility of determining the “roulette replay” of the winning area “21”, while in the RT0 gaming state and the MB gaming state, it is possible to determine the “roulette replay” of the winning area “21”. There is no sex.

  In this embodiment, even if the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 are operated at the same symbol position, winning combinations having different combinations of symbols arranged on the active line depend on the operation order of the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 by the player. There is an area. Specifically, by the internal lottery process described later, “push order bell 01 to 08”, “Bonus transition replay 01 to 02”, “blue 7 uniform replay”, “blue 7 roll replay”, “white 7 middle stage replay When “01-02”, “White 7 diagonally aligned replay 01-04”, and “White 7 top aligned replay 01-02” are determined as the winning areas, the player performs a stop operation of the stop buttons 11, 12, 13. Depending on the order, the combinations of symbols on the active line are different. For example, when “push order bell 01” of the winning area “02” is determined as the winning area by the internal lottery process described later, even if the stop buttons 11, 12, 13 are operated at the same symbol position, Different symbols when the middle stop button 12 is operated, then the left stop button 11 is operated, and the right stop button 13 is finally operated, and when the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 are operated in the other order. Will be displayed on the active line.

  On the other hand, when the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 are operated at the same symbol position, there is a winning area where the combination of symbols aligned on the active line is different regardless of the stop operation sequence by the player. Is provided. Specifically, “MB”, “middle tier bell”, “diagonally aligned bell”, “weak watermelon”, “strong watermelon”, “weak cherry”, “strong cherry”, “middle cherry” by internal lottery processing described later. ”,“ Weak chance role ”,“ Strong chance role ”,“ Decisive role ”,“ Normal replay ”,“ Roulette replay ”and“ Chance replay ” Even if the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 are operated in order, the combination of symbols aligned on the effective line is the same. However, if the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are not operated at an appropriate timing, the combination of symbols related to winning may not be displayed on the active line.

(Winning area determination table)
Next, the winning area determination table will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In the present embodiment, the winning area determination table includes an RT0 winning area determination table (see FIG. 15) and an RT1 winning area determination table (see FIG. 16).

  The winning area determination table is stored in the main ROM 302, and a lottery value is defined for each set value. Here, in the present embodiment, lottery values of “setting 1” to “setting 6” are respectively defined in the RT0 winning area determination table and the RT1 winning area determination table.

(RT0 winning area determination table)
As shown in FIG. 15, the winning area determination table for RT0 is the winning area “MB”, “push order bell 01-08”, “middle bell”, “diagonally aligned bell”, “weak watermelon”, “strong watermelon” Lottery values are defined for “weak cherry”, “strong cherry”, “middle cherry”, “weak chance combination”, “strong chance combination”, “final combination”, and “normal replay”. That is, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and in the RT0 gaming state, “losing”, “roulette replay”, “chance replay”, “Bonus transition replay 01-02”, “blue 7-match replay”, “Blue 7 roll replay”, “White 7 middle row replay 01-02”, “White 7 diagonally replay 01-04” and “White 7 top row replay 01-02” are not determined as winning areas.

(RT1 winning area determination table)
As shown in FIG. 16, the winning area determination table for RT1 is a winning area “losing”, “pushing order bell 01-08”, “middle bell”, “diagonally aligned bell”, “weak watermelon”, “strong watermelon” “Weak cherry”, “Strong cherry”, “Middle cherries”, “Weak chance role”, “Strong chance role”, “Final role”, “Normal replay”, “Roulette replay”, “Chance replay”, “Bonus transition "Replay 01-02", "Blue 7 Match Replay", "Blue 7 Roll Replay", "White 7 Middle Match Replay 01-02", "White 7 Oblique Match Replay 01-04" and "White 7 Top Match Replay 01- The lottery value is defined in “02”. That is, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and “MB” is not determined as the winning area in the RT1 gaming state.

(Stop table selection table and stop table)
Next, the stop table selection table and the stop table will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In the present embodiment, the stop table selection tables are stop table selection tables A to G (see FIG. 17), stop table selection tables H to N (see FIG. 18), stop table selection tables O to T (see FIG. 19), The table includes stop table selection tables U to AA (see FIG. 20), stop table selection tables AB to AI (see FIG. 21), and a stop table selection table AJ (see FIG. 22).

  In the present embodiment, the stop table includes a left reel stop table (see FIG. 23), a middle reel stop table (see FIG. 24), and a right reel stop table (see FIG. 25). .

  The stop table selection table is provided in the main ROM 302. The stop table for the left reel described later (see FIG. 23), the stop table for the middle reel described later (see FIG. 24), and the stop table for the right reel described later (FIG. 25). For reference). Specifically, the stop table selection table is provided for each winning area determined by the internal lottery process described later, and the stop operation sequence of the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 and the symbols stopped on the active line are displayed. Different stop tables will be referenced depending on the combination.

  The stop table is provided in the main ROM 302 and is provided for acquiring the number of sliding frames. Specifically, the stop table defines a symbol position and the number of sliding symbols corresponding to the symbol position.

  The stop table selection table A is a stop table selection table that is referred to when “losing” of the winning area “00” is determined by an internal lottery process described later, and the stop table selection table B is described later. This is a stop table selection table that is referred to when “MB” of the winning area “01” is determined by the internal lottery process. The stop table selection table C is stored in the winning area “02” by the internal lottery process described later. This is a stop table selection table that is referred to when “push order bell 01” is determined. The stop table selection table D is determined as “push order bell 02” in the winning area “03” by an internal lottery process described later. This is a stop table selection table that is referred to in the case where the winning table is selected. A) “04” is a stop table selection table that is referred to when “push order bell 03” is determined. The stop table selection table F is a “push order” of the winning area “05” by an internal lottery process described later. The stop table selection table referred to when “Bell 04” is determined. The stop table selection table G is a case where “Push Order Bell 05” of the winning area “06” is determined by an internal lottery process described later. The stop table selection table H is referred to when the “push order bell 06” of the winning area “07” is determined by the internal lottery process described later. The stop table selection table I is obtained when “push order bell 07” of the winning area “08” is determined by an internal lottery process described later. The stop table selection table J is a stop table selection table that is referred to when “push order bell 08” of the winning area “09” is determined by an internal lottery process described later. is there.

  The stop table selection table K is a stop table selection table that is referred to when the “middle bell” of the winning area “10” is determined by an internal lottery process described later, and the stop table selection table L is described later. This is a stop table selection table that is referred to when “diagonally aligned bell” of the winning area “11” is determined by the internal lottery process. The stop table selection table M is a winning table “ 12 is a stop table selection table that is referred to when “weak watermelon” is determined. The stop table selection table N is determined as “strong watermelon” in the winning area “13” by an internal lottery process described later. The stop table selection table O is referred to when the winning table is selected. This is a stop table selection table that is referred to when “14” “weak cherry” is determined. In the stop table selection table P, “strong cherry” in the winning area “15” is determined by an internal lottery process described later. This is a stop table selection table that is referred to in the case of being played, and the stop table selection table Q is a stop table selection that is referred to when “middle stage cherry” of the winning area “16” is determined by an internal lottery process described later. The stop table selection table R is a stop table selection table that is referred to when the “weak chance” of the winning area “17” is determined by an internal lottery process to be described later. Is a stop table that is referred to when the “strong chance combination” of the winning area “18” is determined by the internal lottery process described later. A bull selection table, stop table selection table T by an internal lottery process described later, a stopping table selection table referred when the "actual hand" of the winning area "19" is determined.

  The stop table selection table U is a stop table selection table that is referred to when “normal replay” of the winning area “20” is determined by an internal lottery process described later, and the stop table selection table V is described later. This is a stop table selection table that is referred to when the “roulette replay” of the winning area “21” is determined by the internal lottery process, and the stop table selection table W is the winning area “22” by the internal lottery process described later. ”Is a stop table selection table that is referred to when“ chance replay ”is determined. In the stop table selection table X,“ Bonus transition replay 01 ”in the winning area“ 23 ”is determined by an internal lottery process described later. Is the stop table selection table that is referred to when the stop table is selected, and the stop table selection table Y is This is a stop table selection table that is referred to when “Bonus transition replay 02” of the winning area “24” is determined by the internal lottery process described later. The stop table selection table Z is a winning table by the internal lottery process described later. This is a stop table selection table that is referred to when “blue 7 uniform replay” of the area “25” is determined. The stop table selection table AA is “blue 7” of the winning area “26” by an internal lottery process described later. It is a stop table selection table that is referred to when “spinning replay” is determined.

  The stop table selection table AB is a stop table selection table that is referred to when “white 7 middle stage replay 01” of the winning area “27” is determined by an internal lottery process to be described later. AC is a stop table selection table that is referred to when “white 7 diagonally aligned replay 01” in the winning area “28” is determined by an internal lottery process described later. The stop table selection table AD is an internal table described later. It is a stop table selection table that is referred to when “white 7 middle stage replay 02” of the winning area “29” is determined by the lottery process. The stop table selection table AE is a winning area by an internal lottery process to be described later. This is a stop table selection table that is referred to when “white 7 diagonally aligned replay 02” of “30” is determined. The stop table selection table AF is a stop table selection table that is referred to when the “white 7 upper stage replay 01” of the winning area “31” is determined by an internal lottery process to be described later. The stop table selection table AG Is a stop table selection table that is referred to when “white 7 diagonally aligned replay 03” in the winning area “32” is determined by an internal lottery process described later. The stop table selection table AH is an internal lottery described later. This is a stop table selection table that is referred to when “White 7 Upper Level Replay 02” in the winning area “33” is determined by the processing. The stop table selection table AI is a winning area “ 34 ”is a stop table selection table that is referred to when“ white 7 diagonally aligned replay 04 ”is determined. Stop table selection table AJ is a table referenced in MB gaming state.

  Here, the stop table selection table includes a stop operation order, an address of the stop table referred to at the time of the first stop, an address of the stop table referred to at the time of the second stop, and an address of the stop table referred to at the time of the third stop. It is prescribed. The stop table selection table defines conditions when the stop table is selected at the second stop and when the stop table is selected at the third stop.

  For example, the main CPU 301 selects the stop table selection table B when “MB” in the winning area “01” is determined in the internal lottery process described later. Then, when the left stop button 11 is first operated, the main CPU 301 refers to “table_L_1” of a left reel stop table (see FIG. 23) to be described later, and performs stop control of the left reel 17a. . Next, when the middle stop button 12 is operated, (a) when the symbol related to “blue 7” is stopped at the middle stage of the left reel 17a as a result of the stop control of the left reel 17a, it will be described later. With reference to “table_C_1” in the middle reel stop table (see FIG. 24), the middle reel 17b is stopped. (B) The left reel 17a is stopped. When the symbol related to “cherry” is stopped, the stop control of the middle reel 17b is performed with reference to “table_C_2” in the middle reel stop table (see FIG. 24) described later, and (c) the left reel 17a is controlled. As a result of the stop control, when a symbol other than the symbol related to “Blue 7” and the symbol related to “Cherry” is stopped in the middle stage of the left reel 17a, a stop table for middle reel described later (see FIG. 24). See "table_C_0" of, it performs the stop control of the middle reel 17b.

  Similarly, the main CPU 301 selects the stop table selection table B when “MB” in the winning area “01” is determined in the internal lottery process described later. When the left stop button 11 is first operated, the main CPU 301 performs stop control of the left reel 17a with reference to “table_L_1” in a later-described left reel stop table (see FIG. 23). As a result, when the symbol related to “Blue 7” is stopped in the middle stage of the left reel 17a, the stop of the middle reel 17b is referred to by referring to “table_C_1” of the stop table for middle reel (see FIG. 24) described later. Take control. Finally, when the right stop button 13 is operated, the main CPU 301 (a) stops the middle reel 17b, and as a result, the symbol related to “blank 2” is stopped at the middle stage of the middle reel 17b. Refers to “table_R_1” of the right reel stop table (see FIG. 25), which will be described later, and controls the stop of the right reel 17c. (B) As a result of stopping the middle reel 17b, “ When a symbol other than the symbol related to “Blank 2” is stopped, the stop control of the right reel 17c is performed with reference to “table_R_2” of a stop table for right reel (see FIG. 25) described later.

  Further, the main CPU 301 selects the stop table selection table X when “Bonus transition replay 01” in the winning area “23” is determined in the internal lottery process described later. Then, when the left stop button 11 is first operated, the main CPU 301 performs stop control of the left reel 17a with reference to “table_L_4” in a later-described left reel stop table (see FIG. 23). . Next, when the middle stop button 12 is operated, stop control of the middle reel 17b is performed with reference to “table_C_0” of a middle reel stop table (see FIG. 24) described later. Finally, when the right stop button 13 is operated, stop control of the right reel 17c is performed with reference to “table_R_0” of a right reel stop table (see FIG. 25) described later.

  On the other hand, when selecting the stop table selection table X, the main CPU 301 first refers to “table_C_14” of the middle reel stop table (see FIG. 24) when the middle reel 17b is operated. Thus, stop control of the middle reel 17b is performed. Next, when the right stop button 13 is operated, (a) as a result of stopping the middle reel 17b, when the symbol related to “red 7” stops in the middle stage of the middle reel 17b, With reference to “table_R_3” in the stop table (see FIG. 25), stop control of the right reel 17c is performed, and (b) as a result of stopping the middle reel 17b, the middle reel 17b has a symbol other than “red 7” in the middle stage. When the symbol is stopped, the stop control of the right reel 17c is performed with reference to “table_R_2” in the right reel stop table (see FIG. 25) described later. Finally, when the left stop button 11 is operated, the stop control of the left reel 17a is performed with reference to “table_L_4” in the left reel stop table (see FIG. 23) described later.

(List of states managed by sub control board)
Next, a list of states managed by the sub control board 400 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The list of states managed by the sub-control board 400 defines a state name and a state number corresponding to each state name. In this embodiment, the state number is “01”, “normal state”, state “Chance state” with the number “02”, “Bonus state” with the state number “03”, “AT state” with the state number “04”, “Addition state A” with the state number “05”, state number “06” is defined as “additional state B” and “07” is the “Bonus ready state”.

(Transition diagram of states managed by sub-control board)
Next, a state transition diagram managed by the sub-control board 400 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The transition diagram of the state managed by the sub-control board 400 satisfies (a) the state managed by the sub-control board 400 and (b) the condition for shifting the state managed by the sub-control board 400 In addition, the transition destination state of the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is defined. For this reason, below, description of each state and description about the transition conditions to each state will be given.

(Normal state)
The normal state is a disadvantageous state for the player as compared to other states. Here, as a result of performing the lottery on whether or not to shift to the chance state in the normal state, the sub CPU 402 is determined to shift to the chance state based on a stage lottery table (see FIG. 38) described later. In this case, control is performed to shift the state managed by the sub-control board 400 from the normal state to the chance state.

  Further, when the sub CPU 402 wins the lottery based on the normal state Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (see FIG. 30) described later in the normal state, the sub CPU 402 is based on the additional state B transition lottery table (see FIG. 32) described later. When the lottery is performed, and the lottery is won, the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is controlled from the normal state to the added state B.

  Further, when the sub CPU 402 wins a lottery based on (a) a normal state bonus preparation state transition lottery table (see FIG. 30) described later (see FIG. 30) in the normal state, the sub CPU 402 enters the added state B transition lottery table (see FIG. 32). When the lottery is performed and the lottery is not won, (b) a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the Bonus preparation state is performed based on a chance mass stop lottery table (see FIG. 39) described later. As a result, when it is determined to shift to the Bonus preparation state, (c) a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the Bonus preparation state is performed based on a battle mass stop lottery table (see FIG. 40) described later. As a result, when it is determined to shift to the Bonus preparation state, (d) when the state is managed by the sub-control board 400 when it is stopped in a fixed cell described later. Performs control to transition from the normal state to the Bonus ready.

(Chance state)
The chance state is a state in which it is easier to shift to the Bonus ready state than in the normal state. Here, in the chance state, the sub CPU 402 performs lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the Bonus preparation state based on (a) the chance state Bonus preparation state transfer lottery table (see FIG. 31). When it is determined to shift to the state, (b) a lotus determination as to whether or not to shift to the bonus preparation state is performed based on a chance-mass stop lottery table (see FIG. 39) described later. When it is decided to shift to the state, (c) as a result of performing lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the Bonus preparation state based on a lottery table for stopping the battle mass (see FIG. 40), which will be described later, When it is decided to shift to the state, (d) when the state is controlled by the sub-control board 400 when it stops in the fixed cell described later, Performs control to shift to the Bonus ready from.

  In addition, when the sub CPU 402 stops at a later-described end cell, the sub CPU 402 performs control to shift the state managed by the sub control board 400 from the chance state to the normal state.

(Bonus ready state)
The Bonus ready state is an advantageous state for the player as compared to the normal state. Here, in the Bonus ready state, the sub CPU 402 displays the symbol combination related to “Red 7 Replay” on the active line, or displays the symbol combination related to “Blue 7 Replay” on the active line. In this case, control is performed to shift the state managed by the sub-control board 400 from the Bonus preparation state to the Bonus state.

  In the present embodiment, in the Bonus preparation state, the sub CPU 402 determines that “Bonus transition replay 01” or “Bonus transition replay 02” is determined by an internal lottery process described later before the “push order bell 01”. When any one of “push order bell 08” is determined, control is performed to display the optimum stop operation order of the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 on the stop operation order display lamp 30 and the liquid crystal display device 46. .

(Bonus state)
The Bonus ready state is an advantageous state for the player as compared to the normal state. Here, the sub CPU 402 changes the state managed by the sub control board 400 from the Bonus state to the AT state based on the value of the Bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405 becoming “0”. Perform transition control.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the sub CPU 402, in the Bonus state, when any of “push order bell 01” to “push order bell 08” is determined by an internal lottery process described later, the stop button 11 , 12 and 13 are controlled so as to display the optimum stop operation order on the stop operation order display lamp 30 and the liquid crystal display device 46.

  In the present embodiment, in the Bonus state, the “red 7” symbol or the “blue 7” symbol is displayed in a straight line on any of the upper line, the middle line, the lower line, the upper right line, or the lower right line. It is transferred to when it is done. Then, in the Bonus state, when “push order bell 01” to “push order bell 08” are determined by an internal lottery process described later, the sub CPU 402 places the symbol combination related to “middle bell” on the active line. Control is performed to notify the stop operation sequence of the stop buttons 11, 12, 13 appropriate for display by the stop operation sequence display lamp 30 or the liquid crystal display device 46. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the “Bonus state” means the first type special combination (RB), the second type special combination (CB), and the first type special combination continuous action device (BB). ), An AT that appears as if the accessory continuous operating device (MB) related to the second type special accessory is operating, and is called a “pseudo bonus”.

(AT state)
The AT state is an advantageous state for the player as compared to the normal state. Here, in the AT state, the sub CPU 402 performs a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the added state A based on (a) a chance-mass stop lottery table (see FIG. 39), which will be described later. When it is determined to shift to A, (c) as a result of performing a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the added state A based on a battle mass stop lottery table (see FIG. 40) described later, the added state When it is determined to shift to A, (d) when stopping in a fixed cell described later, control is performed to shift the state managed by the sub-control board 400 from the AT state to the added state A.

  Further, the sub CPU 402 performs control to shift the state managed by the sub control board 400 from the AT state to the normal state when the sub CPU 402 stops at an end cell described later.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the sub CPU 402, in the AT state, when any one of “push order bell 01” to “push order bell 08” is determined by an internal lottery process described later, the stop button 11 , 12 and 13 are controlled so as to display the optimum stop operation order on the stop operation order display lamp 30 and the liquid crystal display device 46.

(Additional state A)
The added state A is an advantageous state for the player as compared to the normal state. In addition, the added state A is a state in which the number of games that can be played in the AT state is more easily added compared to the AT state. Here, in the added state A, the sub CPU 402 performs a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the added state B based on (a) a chance mass stop lottery table (see FIG. 39), which will be described later. When it is decided to shift to the state B, (b) based on the lottery table for when the battle mass is stopped (see FIG. 40) described later (see FIG. 40), it is determined whether or not to shift to the additional state B. When it is determined to shift to the state B, (c) when stopping to a fixed cell described later, control is performed to shift the state managed by the sub-control board 400 from the added state A to the added state B.

  Further, the sub CPU 402 performs control to shift from the state A managed by the sub control board 400 to the AT state when it stops at an end cell described later.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the sub CPU 402 determines that in the added state A, when any of “push order bell 01” to “push order bell 08” is determined by an internal lottery process described later, Control is performed to display the optimum stop operation order of 11, 12, and 13 on the stop operation order display lamp 30 and the liquid crystal display device 46.

(Additional state B)
The added state B is a state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, and is a state in which the number of sets that can be played in the AT state is added. Here, in the added state B, the sub CPU 402 adds the state managed by the sub control board 400 when the value of the added state B game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405 is “0”. Control to shift from B to the added state A is performed.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the sub CPU 402, in the added state B, the stop button when any of “push order bell 01” to “push order bell 08” is determined by an internal lottery process described later. Control is performed to display the optimum stop operation order of 11, 12, and 13 on the stop operation order display lamp 30 and the liquid crystal display device 46.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the sub CPU 402, in the added state B, when any of the winning areas “27” to “34” is determined by an internal lottery process described later, the stop buttons 11, 12, 13 The optimal stop operation sequence is displayed on the stop operation sequence display lamp 30 or the liquid crystal display device 46. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 sets the stop operation sequence for displaying the symbol combination related to “White 7 Replay” on the active line, and the stop buttons 11, 12, 13 aiming at the symbol related to “White 7”. Control for displaying information on the operation on the liquid crystal display device 46 is performed.

(Direction decision table)
Next, an effect determination table will be described based on FIGS.

  The effect determination table includes a start lever operation effect determination table (see FIG. 28) for determining an effect to be executed when operation of the start lever 10 is detected by the start switch 10sw, and all rotations of the reel 17. It is configured by an all-reel stop effect determination table (see FIG. 29) for determining an effect to be executed when the operation is stopped.

  The effect determination table is provided in the sub ROM 404 and is provided for determining the effects to be performed in each state. Specifically, “production No.” and production contents corresponding to “production No.” are defined. In the effect determination table, conditions for executing effects such as a state managed by the sub CPU 402 are defined.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the start lever operation effect determination table is (a) start lever operation effect determination table (for normal state) used when the state managed by the sub CPU 402 is in the normal state ( 28 (a)), (b) a start lever operation stage effect determination table (for chance state) used when the state managed by the sub CPU 402 is the chance state (see FIG. 28 (b)), (C) Start lever operation effect determination table (for the Bonus state) (see FIG. 28C) used when the state managed by the sub CPU 402 is the Bonus state, and (d) managed by the sub CPU 402. Start lever operation effect determination table (for AT state) used when the state is the AT state (see FIG. 28D) ), (E) start lever operation stage effect determination table (for added state A) (see FIG. 28 (e)) used when the state managed by the sub CPU 402 is the added state A, and (f) sub An effect determination table for start lever operation (for added state B) (see FIG. 28F) used when the state managed by the CPU 402 is the added state B, and (g) the state managed by the sub CPU 402 An effect determination table for operating the start lever (for the Bonus preparation state) (see FIG. 28G) used in the Bonus preparation state is provided.

  In this embodiment, the all-reel stop effect determination table is (a) an all-reel stop effect determination table (for the normal state) used when the state managed by the sub CPU 402 is the normal state (see FIG. 29 (a)), (b) All reel stop effect determination table (for chance state) used when the state managed by the sub CPU 402 is the chance state (see FIG. 29B), ( c) All reel stop effect determination table (for the Bonus state) (see FIG. 29C) used when the state managed by the sub CPU 402 is the Bonus state, and (d) the state managed by the sub CPU 402 All-reel stop effect determination table (for AT state) (see FIG. 29D) used when is in the AT state, and (e) the sub CPU 402 All-reel stop effect determination table (for added state A) (see FIG. 29E) used when the managed state is the added state A, and (f) the state managed by the sub CPU 402 is added. All-reel stop effect determination table used for state B (for added state B) (see FIG. 29F) and (g) used when the state managed by the sub CPU 402 is the Bonus preparation state. An all-reel stop effect determination table (for the Bonus preparation state) (see FIG. 29G) is provided.

(Bonus preparation state transfer lottery table)
Next, the Bonus preparation state transition lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS.

  The Bonus preparation state transfer lottery table is a normal state Bonus preparation state transfer lottery table (see FIG. 30) used when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is a normal state, and a state managed by the sub-control board 400. Is formed by a chance state Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (see FIG. 31) used in the case of a chance state.

(Normal condition Bonus preparation state transition lottery table)
The normal state Bonus preparation state transition lottery table is provided in the sub-ROM, and is provided for lottery of whether or not to shift from the normal state to the Bonus preparation state. Specifically, in the normal state Bonus preparation state transition lottery table, a lottery value is defined for each winning area. For example, when the “middle bell” of the winning area “10” is determined by the internal lottery process described later, the winning is “10/65536” and the “65526/65536” is not winning. . Then, when the lottery is won, the sub CPU 402 performs control to shift the state managed by the sub control board 400 from the normal state to the Bonus preparation state.

(Bonus preparation state transfer lottery table for chance states)
The chance state Bonus preparation state transition lottery table is provided in the sub-ROM, and is provided for lottery of whether or not to shift from the chance state to the Bonus preparation state. Specifically, in the chance state Bonus preparation state transition lottery table, a lottery value is defined for each winning area. For example, if the “middle bell” of the winning area “10” is determined by the internal lottery process described later, it will be won with a probability of “20/65536” and will not be won with a probability of “65516/65536”. . When the lottery is won, the sub CPU 402 performs control to shift the state managed by the sub control board 400 from the chance state to the Bonus preparation state.

  Here, when the normal state bonus preparation state transition lottery table is compared with the chance state bonus preparation state transition lottery table, when one winning area is determined, the chance state bonus preparation state transition lottery table is used. The lottery is easier to win than when the lottery is performed using the normal state Bonus preparation state transition lottery table. Therefore, it can be said that the chance state easily shifts to the Bonus ready state as compared with the normal state.

(Additional state B transition lottery table)
Next, the added state B transition lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The added state B transition lottery table is provided in the sub-ROM 404, and it is more advantageous for the player when the player wins as a result of performing the lottery using the normal state Bonus preparation state transition lottery table in the normal state. It is provided to determine whether or not to shift to the added state B. Specifically, a lottery value is defined in the extra state B transition lottery table, and it is won with a probability of “6553/65536” and is not won with a probability of “58983/65536”. Then, the sub CPU 402 performs control to shift the state managed by the sub control board 400 from the normal state to the additional state B when the winning is determined as a result of performing the lottery using the additional state B transition lottery table. Do.

(Character acquisition lottery table)
Next, the character acquisition lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The character acquisition lottery table is used when the character A acquisition lottery table (see FIG. 33A) used when the character A is acquired or not and when the character B is acquired or not. Character B acquisition lottery table (see FIG. 33 (b)), a character C acquisition lottery table (see FIG. 33 (c)) used to determine whether or not to acquire character C, and character D The character D acquisition lottery table (see FIG. 33 (d)) used when drawing whether or not to perform and the character E acquisition lottery table (FIG. 33 (FIG. 33 (3) used when drawing whether or not to acquire the character E). e)) is provided.

  The character acquisition lottery table is provided in the sub ROM 404, and is provided for drawing whether or not to acquire a character. Specifically, the character acquisition lottery table defines a lottery value for each character. Then, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of storing in a character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 when the lottery is performed using the character acquisition lottery table and the winning is determined.

(Normal state map creation table)
Next, the normal state map creation table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The normal state map creation table includes (a) a confirmed mass lottery table (see FIG. 34 (a)) used for drawing whether or not to create a confirmed mass, and (b) whether to create a battle mass. (C) Chance mass lottery table (see FIG. 34 (c)) used for drawing whether or not to create a chance mass. (D) A character acquisition cell lottery table (see FIG. 34 (d)) used for drawing whether or not a character acquisition cell is to be created, and (e) whether or not to create a stage transition cell. Is composed of a stage transition mass lottery table (see FIG. 34 (e)).

  The normal state map creation table is provided in the sub ROM 404 and is provided for creating a map in the normal state. Specifically, in the normal state map creation table, a lottery value is defined for each character for each cell.

(Confirmed trout lottery table)
The confirmed cell lottery table is provided for drawing whether or not to create a confirmed cell. In addition, when the information related to “character H” is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405, the confirmed mass lottery table is won with the probability of “2560/65536”, and “62976 / 65536 "will be unwinned. If information related to “character E” is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405, the winning is made with a probability of “1280/65536”, and the probability is “64256/65536”. Wins. Also, if the information related to “Character H” and “Character E” is not stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405, the winning is made with a probability of “655/65536”, and “6481 / 65536 "will be unwinned. Then, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of creating a confirmed cell when a winning is determined as a result of performing the lottery using the confirmed cell lottery table.

(Competitive trout lottery table)
The battle mass lottery table is provided for drawing whether or not to create a battle mass. In addition, when the information related to “character F” is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405, the battle mass lottery table is won with a probability of “2560/65536”, and “62976 / 65536 "will be unwinned. If information related to “character B” is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405, the winning is made with a probability of “1280/65536” and the probability of “64256/65536” is not. Wins. Also, if the information related to “Character F” and “Character B” is not stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405, the winning is made with the probability of “655/65536”, and “6481 / 65536 "will be unwinned. Then, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of creating a battle square when the lottery is performed using the battle mass lottery table and the winning combination is determined.

(Chance mass lottery table)
The chance mass lottery table is provided for drawing whether or not to create a chance mass. Further, the chance mass lottery table is won with a probability of “2560/65536” when information related to “character F” is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405, and “62976 / 65536 "will be unwinned. If information related to “character A” is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405, the winning is made with a probability of “1280/65536”, and the probability is “64256/65536”. Wins. Also, if the information related to “Character F” and “Character A” is not stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405, it is won with the probability of “655/65536”, and “6481 / 65536 "will be unwinned. Then, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of creating a chance mass when the result of the lottery using the chance mass lottery table is a win.

(Character acquisition mass lottery table)
The character acquisition cell lottery table is provided to select whether or not to create a character acquisition cell. Also, the character acquisition cell lottery table is won with the probability of “2560/65536” when information related to “character G” is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405, and “62976” / 65536 "is not won. If information related to “character D” is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405, the winning is made with a probability of “1280/65536”, and the probability is “64256/65536”. Wins. Also, if the information related to “Character G” and “Character D” is not stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405, the winning is performed with a probability of “655/65536”, and “6481 / 65536 "will be unwinned. Then, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of creating a character acquisition cell when the lottery is performed using the character acquisition cell lottery table and the winning combination is determined.

(Stage transition mass lottery table)
The stage transition square lottery table is provided for lottery of whether or not to create a stage transition square. In addition, the stage transfer mass lottery table is won with the probability of “655/65536” regardless of the character information stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405, and the probability of “6481/65536”. It is not elected. Then, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of creating a stage transition square if the lottery is performed using the stage transition square lottery table and the winning combination is determined.

(Chance state map creation table)
Next, the chance state map creation table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The chance state map creation table is used for lottery of whether or not to create a battle cell, whether or not to create a battle cell, for determining whether or not to create a final cell. A battle cell lottery table (see FIG. 35B), a chance cell lottery table (see FIG. 35C) used for drawing whether or not to create a chance cell, and whether to create a character acquisition cell The character acquisition cell lottery table (see FIG. 35 (d)) used for lottery or the end cell lottery table (see FIG. 35 (e)) used for drawing whether or not to create the end cell. It is configured.

  The chance state map creation table is provided in the sub-ROM 404, and is provided for creating a map in the chance state. Specifically, in the chance state map creation table, a lottery value is defined for each character for each cell.

(Confirmed trout lottery table)
The confirmed cell lottery table is provided for drawing whether or not to create a confirmed cell. In addition, when the information related to “character H” is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405, the confirmed mass lottery table is won with a probability of “3276/65536”, and “62260 / 65536 "will be unwinned. If information related to “character E” is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405, the winning is made with a probability of “1638/65536” and the probability of “63898/65536” is not set. Winning. In addition, when the information related to “character H” and “character E” is not stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405, the winning is performed with a probability of “868/65536”, and “64668 / 65536 "will be unwinned. Then, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of creating a confirmed cell when a winning is determined as a result of performing the lottery using the confirmed cell lottery table.

(Competitive trout lottery table)
The battle mass lottery table is provided for drawing whether or not to create a battle mass. In addition, when the information related to “character F” is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405, the battle mass lottery table is won with a probability of “3276/65536”, and “62260 / 65536 "will be unwinned. If information related to “character B” is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405, the winning is “1638/65536” and the “63898/65536” is non-winning. Wins. In addition, when the information related to “character F” and “character B” is not stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405, the winning is made with the probability of “868/65536”, and “64668 / 65536 "will be unwinned. Then, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of creating a battle square when the lottery is performed using the battle mass lottery table and the winning combination is determined.

(Chance mass lottery table)
The chance mass lottery table is provided for drawing whether or not to create a chance mass. Further, the chance mass lottery table is won with a probability of “3276/65536” when information related to “character F” is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405, and “62260 / 65536 "will be unwinned. Also, when information related to “character A” is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405, it is elected with a probability of “1638/65536”, and with a probability of “63898/65536”. Wins. Also, if the information related to “Character F” and “Character A” is not stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405, the winning is performed with the probability of “868/65536”, and “64668 / 65536 "will be unwinned. Then, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of creating a chance mass when the result of the lottery using the chance mass lottery table is a win.

(Character acquisition mass lottery table)
The character acquisition cell lottery table is provided to select whether or not to create a character acquisition cell. Further, the character acquisition cell lottery table is won with a probability of “3276/65536” when information related to “character G” is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405, and “62260 / 65536 "is not won. If information related to “character D” is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405, the winning is made with a probability of “1638/65536” and the probability of “63898/65536” is not set. Wins. In addition, when the information related to “character G” and “character D” is not stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405, the winning is made with the probability of “868/65536”, and “64668 / 65536 "will be unwinned. Then, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of creating a character acquisition cell when the lottery is performed using the character acquisition cell lottery table and the winning combination is determined.

(End mass lottery table)
The end cell lottery table is provided for drawing whether or not to create an end cell. In addition, the end cell lottery table is won with a probability of “2845/65536” when information related to “character D” is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405, and “6261 / 65536 "will be unwinned. Also, when information related to “character G” is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405, it is won with a probability of “1285/65536”, and with a probability of “64251/65536”. Wins. In addition, when information related to “character H” is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405, the winning combination is always lost. In addition, when information relating to “character D”, “character G”, and “character H” is not stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405, the winning is performed with a probability of “6553/65536”. And it is not won with a probability of “58983/65536”. Then, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of creating an end cell when a lottery is made using the end cell lottery table and the winning result is determined.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 402 performs lottery based on the end mass lottery table immediately after shifting to the chance state, but is not limited thereto. For example, the sub CPU 402 does not have to perform the lottery by the end mass lottery table until a predetermined number of games has elapsed after shifting to the chance state. As a result, since the chance state does not shift to the normal state for a predetermined number of games, the discouragement of the player due to the transition to the normal state immediately after shifting to the chance state can be eliminated.

(Addition state A map creation table)
Next, the added state A map creation table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The added state A map creation table is used to draw a determined cell lottery table (see FIG. 36A) used for drawing whether or not to create a fixed cell, and whether or not to create a battle cell. The battle cell lottery table used (see FIG. 36 (b)), the chance cell lottery table (see FIG. 36 (c)) used for drawing whether or not to create a chance cell, and whether to create a character acquisition cell A character acquisition cell lottery table (see FIG. 36 (d)) used for lottery determination, and an additional cell lottery table (FIGS. 36 (e) to (e) shown in FIG. h)), and an end cell lottery table (see FIG. 36 (i)) used for drawing whether or not to create an end cell.

  The added state A map creation table is provided in the sub-ROM 404, and is provided for creating a map in the added state A. Specifically, in the added state A map creation table, a lottery value is defined for each character for each cell.

(Confirmed trout lottery table)
The confirmed cell lottery table is provided for drawing whether or not to create a confirmed cell. In addition, when the information related to “character H” is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405, the confirmed mass lottery table is won with a probability of “2845/65536”, and “6261 / 65536 "will be unwinned. Also, when information related to “character E” is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405, it is elected with a probability of “1285/65536”, and with a probability of “64251/65536”. Winning. Further, when the information related to “character H” and “character E” is not stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405, the winning is made with a probability of “596/65536”, and “64940 / 65536 "will be unwinned. Then, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of creating a confirmed cell when a winning is determined as a result of performing the lottery using the confirmed cell lottery table.

(Competitive trout lottery table)
The battle mass lottery table is provided for drawing whether or not to create a battle mass. Further, the battle mass lottery table is won with a probability of “2845/65536” when information related to “character F” is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405, and “6261 / 65536 "will be unwinned. If information related to “character B” is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405, it is won with a probability of “1285/65536” and non-probable with a probability of “64251/65536”. Wins. Further, when the information related to “character F” and “character B” is not stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405, the winning is made with the probability of “596/65536”, and “64940 / 65536 "will be unwinned. Then, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of creating a battle square when the lottery is performed using the battle mass lottery table and the winning combination is determined.

(Chance mass lottery table)
The chance mass lottery table is provided for drawing whether or not to create a chance mass. Also, the chance mass lottery table is won with a probability of “2845/65536” when information related to “character F” is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405, and “6261 / 65536 "will be unwinned. In addition, when information related to “character A” is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405, it is won with a probability of “1285/65536”, and with a probability of “64251/65536”. Wins. Also, if the information related to “Character F” and “Character A” is not stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405, it is won with a probability of “596/65536”, and “64940 / 65536 "will be unwinned. Then, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of creating a chance mass when the result of the lottery using the chance mass lottery table is a win.

(Character acquisition mass lottery table)
The character acquisition cell lottery table is provided to select whether or not to create a character acquisition cell. Further, the character acquisition cell lottery table is won with a probability of “2845/65536” when information related to “character G” is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405, and “62691” / 65536 "is not won. If information related to “character D” is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405, it is won with a probability of “1285/65536” and non-probable with a probability of “64251/65536”. Wins. In addition, when the information related to “character G” and “character D” is not stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405, the winning is made with the probability of “596/65536”, and “64940 / 65536 "will be unwinned. Then, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of creating a character acquisition cell when the lottery is performed using the character acquisition cell lottery table and the winning combination is determined.

(Additional trout lottery table)
The additional cell lottery table is: (a) When stopped, an additional cell lottery table (additional game number = 5) is added to the value of the AT state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405 (FIG. 36). (See (e)), (b) An additional mass lottery table (the number of added games = 10) that is added with “10” to the value of the AT state game number counter provided in the sub-RAM 405 when stopped (see FIG. 36). (See (f)), (c) When stopped, an additional mass lottery table (additional game number = 20) in which “20” is added to the value of the AT state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405 (FIG. 36). (See (g)), (d) An additional mass lottery table (“30” is added to the value of the AT state game number counter provided in the sub-RAM 405 when stopped) ( Place the game number = 30) is constituted by a (FIG. 36 (h) see).

(Additional mass lottery table (number of additional games = 5))
The additional cell lottery table (the number of additional games = 5) is provided for drawing whether or not to create an additional cell (the number of additional games = 5). Further, the additional mass lottery table (the number of additional games = 5) has a probability of “963/65536” when information related to “character G” is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405. Will be won and will be unwinned with a probability of “64573/65536”. In addition, when the information related to “character C” is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405, it is won with the probability of “852/65536”, and with the probability of “64884/65536”. Wins. Also, if the information related to “Character G” and “Character C” is not stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405, the winning is made with the probability of “741/65536”, and “64795 / 65536 "will be unwinned. Then, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of creating an additional cell (the number of additional games = 5) when the winning is determined as a result of performing the lottery using the additional cell lottery table (the number of additional games = 5).

(Additional mass lottery table (number of additional games = 10))
The additional cell lottery table (the number of additional games = 10) is provided for drawing whether or not to create an additional cell (the number of additional games = 10). Further, the additional mass lottery table (the number of added games = 10) has a probability of “963/65536” when information related to “character G” is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405. Will be won and will be unwinned with a probability of “64573/65536”. In addition, when the information related to “character C” is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405, it is won with the probability of “852/65536”, and with the probability of “64884/65536”. Wins. Also, if the information related to “Character G” and “Character C” is not stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405, the winning is made with the probability of “741/65536”, and “64795 / 65536 "will be unwinned. Then, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of creating an additional cell (the number of additional games = 10) when the winning is determined as a result of the lottery using the additional cell lottery table (the number of additional games = 10).

(Additional mass lottery table (number of additional games = 20))
The additional cell lottery table (the number of additional games = 20) is provided for drawing whether or not to create an additional cell (the number of additional games = 20). In addition, when the information related to “character G” is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405, the added mass lottery table (number of added games = 20) has a probability of “621/65536”. Will be elected and won with a probability of “64915/65536”. In addition, when information related to “character C” is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405, it is won with a probability of “514/65536”, and with a probability of “65022/65536”. Wins. Also, if the information related to “Character G” and “Character C” is not stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405, the winning is made with a probability of “412/65536”, and “65124 / 65536 "will be unwinned. Then, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of creating an additional cell (the number of additional games = 20) when the winning is determined as a result of performing the lottery using the additional cell lottery table (the number of additional games = 20).

(Additional mass lottery table (number of additional games = 30))
The additional cell lottery table (the number of additional games = 30) is provided for drawing whether or not to create an additional cell (the number of additional games = 30). Further, the additional mass lottery table (the number of additional games = 30) has a probability of “321/65536” when information related to “character G” is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405. Will be won and will be unwinned with a probability of “65215/65536”. In addition, when information related to “character C” is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405, the winning is made with a probability of “210/65536” and the probability of “65326/65536” is not set. Wins. Further, when the information related to “character G” and “character C” is not stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405, the winning is made with a probability of “109/65536”, and “65427 / 65536 "will be unwinned. Then, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of creating an additional cell (the number of additional games = 30) when a lottery is performed using the additional cell lottery table (the number of additional games = 30).

(End mass lottery table)
The end cell lottery table is provided to select whether or not to create an end cell when the value of the AT state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405 is “0”. In addition, the end cell lottery table is won with a probability of “2845/65536” when information related to “character D” is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405, and “6261 / 65536 "will be unwinned. Also, when information related to “character G” is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405, it is won with a probability of “1285/65536”, and with a probability of “64251/65536”. Wins. In addition, when information related to “character H” is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405, the winning combination is always lost. In addition, when information relating to “character D”, “character G”, and “character H” is not stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405, the winning is performed with a probability of “6553/65536”. And it is not won with a probability of “58983/65536”. Then, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of creating an end cell when a lottery is made using the end cell lottery table and the winning result is determined.

(Stage lottery table)
Next, the stage lottery table will be described based on FIG.

  The stage lottery table includes a stage A stay stage lottery table (see FIG. 38A) used when performing stage transition lottery in stage A and a stage used when performing stage transition lottery in stage B. It is composed of the stage B lottery table for B stay (see FIG. 38B).

  The stage lottery table is provided in the sub ROM 404, and is provided for lottery of whether or not to shift the stage in the normal state. Specifically, in the stage lottery table, a lottery value is defined for each character and the stage of the transfer destination.

(Stage lottery table for stage A stay)
A stage lottery table for staying in stage A is provided to perform stage transition lottery when staying at stage A and stopping at the stage transition mass in the normal state. Specifically, when the sub CPU 402 stays at the stage A and stops at the stage transition cell, the information related to the “character H” is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is, it will remain in stage A with a probability of “40960/65536”, will move to stage B with a probability of “16384/65536”, and will enter a chance state with a probability of “8192/65536” It becomes.

  Further, when the information related to “character E” is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405, the stage A remains at the probability of “48640/65536”, and “12800/65536”. The stage will be shifted to the stage B with probability, and the chance state will be shifted to with a probability of “4096/65536”.

  Further, when the information related to “character H” and “character E” is not stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405, the stage A remains at the probability of “55296/65536”. The stage will be shifted to stage B with a probability of “8192/65536”, and the chance state will be shifted to with a probability of “2048/65536”.

(Stage lottery table for stage B stay)
A stage lottery table for staying at stage B is provided for performing stage transition lottery when staying at stage B and stopping at the stage transition mass in the normal state. Specifically, when the sub CPU 402 stays at the stage B and stops at the stage transition cell, the information related to the “character H” is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is, it will remain stage B with a probability of “40960/65536”, will transition to stage A with a probability of “8192/65536”, and will transition to a chance state with a probability of “16384/65536” It becomes.

  Further, when the information related to “character E” is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405, the stage B remains at the probability of “40960/65536”, and “16384/65536” The stage will be shifted to the stage A with a probability, and the chance state will be shifted to with a probability of “8192/65536”.

  Further, when the information related to “character H” and “character E” is not stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405, the stage B remains at the probability of “28672/65536”. The stage will be shifted to stage A with a probability of “32768/65536”, and the chance state will be shifted to with a probability of “4096/65536”.

(Lottery table for chance mass stop)
Next, the chance mass stop lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The chance mass stop lottery table is a chance mass Bonus preparation state transition lottery table used when lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the Bonus preparation state in the normal state and the chance state. 39 (a)), in the AT state, when the chance mass is stopped, the chance mass addition state A transition lottery table (FIG. 39 (b)) used when the lottery is determined whether to shift to the addition state A or not. ))) In the added state A, if the chance mass is stopped, the chance cell added state B transition lottery table used when the lottery is determined whether to shift to the added state B (see FIG. 39C) It is comprised by.

  The chance-mass stop lottery table is provided in the sub-ROM 404, and is provided for drawing whether or not to shift to an advantageous state as compared with the current state when the chance-mass stop. . Specifically, the lottery table for chance mass stop has a lottery value for each character.

(Bonus preparation state transfer lottery table for chance mass)
The chance mass Bonus preparation state transition lottery table is used when lottery is performed to determine whether or not to transition to the Bonus preparation state when the chance mass stops in the normal state or the chance state. Specifically, when the sub CPU 402 is stopped in the chance cell in the normal state or the chance state, information related to “character H” is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. You will always win. Also, when information related to “character A” is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405, it is won with a probability of “12533/65536” and non-probable with a probability of “53003/65536”. Wins. In addition, when the information related to “character H” and “character A” is not stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405, the winning is performed with the probability of “8192/65536”, and “57344 / 65536 "will be unwinned. Then, the sub CPU 402 performs the lottery using the chance mass Bonus preparation state transition lottery table, and when it is won, the state managed by the sub control board 400 is changed from the normal state or the chance state to the Bonus preparation. Process to transition to the state.

(Chance mass extra state A transition lottery table)
The chance state extra state A transition lottery table is used when lottery is performed to determine whether or not to transition to the extra state A when the chance mass stops in the AT state. Specifically, when the sub CPU 402 stops in chance mass in the AT state, the information related to “character H” is always stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. Winning. If information related to “character A” is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405, the winning is made with a probability of “10966/65536” and the probability of “54570/65536” is not set. Winning. Further, when the information related to “character H” and “character A” is not stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405, the winning is made with the probability of “6857/65536”, and “58679 / 65536 "will be unwinned. Then, the sub CPU 402 shifts the state managed by the sub control board 400 from the AT state to the added state A when the winning is determined as a result of the lottery using the chance mass added state A shift lottery table. Process.

(Chance mass extra state B transition lottery table)
The chance state extra state B transition lottery table is used when lottery is performed to determine whether or not to transition to the extra state B when the chance mass stops in the extra state A. Specifically, when the sub CPU 402 stops in the chance mass in the added state A, when the information related to “character H” is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405, Be sure to win. In addition, when information related to “character A” is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405, it is won with a probability of “6258/65536” and not with a probability of “59278/65536”. Winning. In addition, when the information related to “character H” and “character A” is not stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405, the winning is performed with the probability of “3254/65536”, and “62282 / 65536 "will be unwinned. Then, the sub CPU 402 shifts the state managed by the sub control board 400 from the added state A to the added state B when the winning is determined as a result of the lottery using the chance mass added state B shift lottery table. Perform the process.

(Lottery table for when the battle trout stops)
Next, the lottery table for stopping the battle mass will be described with reference to FIG.

  The battle mass stop lottery table is a battle mass Bonus preparation state transition lottery table used when lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the Bonus preparation state when the battle mass stops in the normal state and the chance state ( (See FIG. 40 (a)), in the AT state, when the player stops at the battle square, whether or not to shift to the additional state A is selected by lottery table for the battle mass additional state A shift (FIG. 40 (b)). )), In the added state A, when the player stops on the battle cell, whether or not to shift to the added state B is selected by lottery table for the battle cell added state B (see FIG. 40C). It is comprised by.

  The battle mass stop-time lottery table is provided in the sub ROM 404, and is provided for lottery of whether or not to shift to an advantageous state compared to the current state when the battle mass stops. . Specifically, a lottery value for each character is defined in the lottery table for when the battle mass is stopped.

(Bonus preparation state transfer lottery table for battle mass)
The battle mass Bonus preparation state transition lottery table is used when lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the Bonus preparation state when the battle mass stops in the normal state or the chance state. Specifically, when the sub CPU 402 is stopped in the battle space in the normal state or the chance state, information related to “character H” is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. You will always win. If information related to “character B” is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405, the winning is “12533/65536” and the non-probability is “53003/65536”. Wins. Also, if the information related to “Character H” and “Character B” is not stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405, the winning is performed with the probability of “8192/65536”, and “57344 / 65536 "will be unwinned. Then, the sub CPU 402 performs the lottery using the battle mass Bonus preparation state transition lottery table, and when the winning is made, the state managed by the sub control board 400 is changed from the normal state or the chance state to the Bonus preparation. Process to transition to the state.

(Additional state A transition lottery table for battle mass)
The battle mass extra state A transition lottery table is used when lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the extra state A when the battle mass stops in the AT state. Specifically, when the sub CPU 402 stops in the battle space in the AT state, the information related to “character H” is always stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. Wins. In addition, when information related to “character B” is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405, it is won with a probability of “10966/65536” and non-probable with a probability of “54570/65536”. Wins. Further, when the information related to “character H” and “character A” is not stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405, the winning is made with the probability of “6857/65536”, and “58679 / 65536 "will be unwinned. Then, the sub CPU 402 shifts the state managed by the sub control board 400 from the AT state to the additional state A when the winning is determined as a result of the lottery using the competitive mass additional state A transition lottery table. Process.

(Additional state B transition lottery table for battle mass)
The battle state extra state B transition lottery table is used when lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the extra state B when the battle mass stops in the extra state A. Specifically, when the sub CPU 402 stops in the battle space in the added state A and the information related to “character H” is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405, Be sure to win. In addition, when information related to “character A” is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405, it is won with a probability of “6258/65536” and not with a probability of “59278/65536”. Winning. In addition, when the information related to “character H” and “character A” is not stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405, the winning is performed with the probability of “3254/65536”, and “62282 / 65536 "will be unwinned. Then, the sub CPU 402 shifts the state managed by the sub control board 400 from the added state A to the added state B when the winning is determined as a result of the lottery using the battle mass added state B shift lottery table. Perform the process.

(Characteristics list)
Next, a list of character characteristics will be described with reference to FIG.

  When stopping at the character acquisition cell, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of drawing whether or not to acquire any of the characters A to E based on the character acquisition lottery table (see FIG. 33). And the privilege which becomes advantageous for a player changes with acquired characters. Therefore, the characteristics of each character will be described.

(Character A)
When information related to the character A is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405, information related to the character A is not stored (however, information related to the character H is stored). It is easier to shift to a more advantageous state for the player when stopping at the chance mass compared to (except the case). In addition, when information relating to the character A is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405 at the time of creating the map, information relating to the character A is not stored (however, the character F includes Compared with a case where such information is stored (excluding cases where such information is stored), chance masses are easily created. Note that the sub CPU 402 performs control to erase information relating to the character A stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 based on the fact that the sub CPU 402 has stopped at chance chance.

(Character B)
When information related to character B is stored in the character information storage area provided in sub-RAM 405, information related to character B is not stored (however, information related to character H is stored). It is easier to shift to a more advantageous state for the player when the player stops at the battle mass. In addition, when information relating to the character B is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405 at the time of creating the map, information relating to the character B is not stored (however, in the character F) Compared with a case where such information is stored (excluding cases where such information is stored), a battle mass is easily created. Note that the sub CPU 402 performs control for erasing the information related to the character B stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 based on the fact that the sub CPU 402 has stopped at the battle square.

(Character C)
When information related to the character C is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405, information related to the character C is not stored (however, information related to the character H is stored). In comparison with the other cases, a larger value is added as the number of additional sets. In addition, when information relating to the character C is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 at the time of creating the map, information relating to the character C is not stored (however, the character G includes Compared to the case where such information is stored (excluding cases where such information is stored), it is easier to create an additional mass. Note that the sub CPU 402 performs control for erasing the information related to the character C stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 based on the fact that the sub CPU 402 has stopped at the additional cell.

(Character D)
When information relating to the character D is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405 at the time of creating the map, information relating to the character D is not stored (however, the character G and the character H Compared to the case where the information relating to (2) is stored), the end cell is less likely to be created in the AT state. In addition, when the information related to the character D is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405 at the time of creating the map, the information related to the character D is not stored (however, the character G includes Compared to the case where such information is stored (excluding the case where such information is stored), it is easier to create a character acquisition cell. The sub CPU 402 performs control to erase information related to the character D stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 based on the lottery result by the character D elimination lottery process described later.

(Character E)
When information related to the character E is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405, information related to the character E is not stored (however, information related to the character H is stored). Compared to (except the case), it is easier to shift to the chance state in the normal state. Further, at the time of creating the map, if the information related to the character E is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405, the information related to the character E is not stored (however, the character G includes Compared to the case where such information is stored (excluding the case where such information is stored), it is easier to create a definite cell. Note that the sub CPU 402 performs control to delete information related to the character E stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 based on the fact that the sub CPU 402 has stopped at the fixed cell.

(Character F)
The character F is a character that can be acquired when the character A and the character B are acquired. Then, when the sub CPU 402 acquires the character F, the sub CPU 402 performs control to store the information related to the character F in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405.

  Further, at the time of creating the map, when the information related to the character F is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405, the chance is compared with the case where the information related to the character F is not stored. Masses and battle masses are easily created. The sub CPU 402 performs control to erase information related to the character F stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 based on the fact that “normal replay” is established “20” times.

(Character G)
The character G is a character that can be acquired when the character C and the character D are acquired. Then, when the sub CPU 402 acquires the character G, the sub CPU 402 performs control to store information related to the character G in a character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405.

  In addition, when information relating to the character G is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405 at the time of creating the map, compared to the case where the information relating to the character G is not stored, Acquired cells and added cells are easily created. In addition, when information relating to the character G is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405 at the time of creating the map, information relating to the character G is not stored (however, the character H is included in the character H). Compared to a case where the information is stored (excluding cases where such information is stored), it is difficult to create an end cell. Note that the sub CPU 402 performs control to erase information related to the character G stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 based on the fact that “Bell” has won “5” consecutive times. Do.

(Character H)
The character H is a character that can be acquired when the character E, the character F, and the character G are acquired. Then, when the sub CPU 402 has acquired the character H, the sub CPU 402 performs control to store information on the character H in a character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405.

  Further, at the time of creating the map, if the information related to the character H is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405, the information is confirmed as compared with the case where the information related to the character H is not stored. Masses are easily created. Further, when the map is created, if the information related to the character H is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405, the end cell is not created. Further, when the information related to the character H is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405, a state that is more advantageous for the player when stopped in the battle square and when stopped in the chance square. It is transferred to. The sub CPU 402 performs control to erase information related to the character H stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 based on the fact that “50” games have been performed.

  In this way, since the benefits that are advantageous to the player differ depending on the acquired character, the player pays attention to the acquired character, so that the interest in the game is improved.

  Further, as described above, the erasure condition varies depending on the acquired character. Therefore, for example, in the normal state, the information related to the character A and the information related to the character B are stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405, stopped in the chance mass, and shifted to the Bonus preparation state. And In this case, the information related to character A is erased because it satisfies the erasure condition, but the information related to character B does not satisfy the erasure condition, so the information related to character B is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405. Remains retained. Therefore, even if the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is shifted, since the information related to the character is taken over, it is not wasteful to acquire the character.

(Bonus state game counter addition lottery table)
Next, based on FIG. 42, the Bonus state game number counter addition lottery table will be described.

  The Bonus state game number counter addition lottery table is provided in the sub ROM 404, and when any of the winning areas “10” to “19” is determined by the internal lottery process described later in the Bonus preparation state, It is used when a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to add the number of games that can be played in the Bonus state. Specifically, the Bonus state game number counter addition lottery table defines a lottery value corresponding to the winning area and the number of games to be added. When a winning area other than the winning areas “10” to “19” is determined by an internal lottery process described later, the number of games that can be played in the bonus state is not added.

(AT state game number counter addition lottery table)
Next, the AT state game number counter addition lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The AT state game number counter addition lottery table is an AT state game number counter addition lottery table (AT state) used in the AT state when performing a lottery to determine whether or not to add the AT state game number counter (FIG. 43). (See (a)), and in the added state A, an AT state game number counter added lottery table (added state A) used when performing a lottery to determine whether or not to add an AT state game number counter (added state A) (FIG. 43 ( b)), and in the added state B, an AT state game number counter added lottery table (added state B) used when performing a lottery to determine whether or not to add an AT state game number counter (added state B) (FIG. 43 (c)). Reference).

(AT state game number counter addition lottery table (AT state))
The AT state game number counter addition lottery table (AT state) is provided in the sub ROM 404, and in the AT state, one of the winning areas “10” to “19” is determined by an internal lottery process described later. Is used when performing a lottery to determine whether or not to add the number of games that can be played in the AT state. Specifically, in the AT state game number counter addition lottery table (AT state), a lottery value corresponding to the winning area and the number of games to be added is defined. When a winning area other than the winning areas “10” to “19” is determined by an internal lottery process described later, the number of games that can be played in the AT state is not added.

(AT game number counter addition lottery table (additional state A))
The AT state game number counter extra lottery table (additional state A) is provided in the sub ROM 404. In the extra state A, any of the winning areas “10” to “19” is determined by an internal lottery process described later. When it is determined, it is used when performing a lottery to determine whether or not to add the number of games that can be played in the AT state. Specifically, the AT state game number counter extra lottery table (additional state A) defines a lottery value corresponding to the winning area and the number of games to be added. When a winning area other than the winning areas “10” to “19” is determined by an internal lottery process described later, the number of games that can be played in the AT state is not added.

(AT game number counter addition lottery table (additional state B))
The AT state game number counter extra lottery table (additional state B) is provided in the sub ROM 404. In the extra state B, any one of the winning areas “10” to “19” is determined by an internal lottery process described later. When it is determined, it is used when performing a lottery to determine whether or not to add the number of games that can be played in the AT state. Specifically, the AT state game number counter extra lottery table (extra state B) defines a lottery value corresponding to the winning area and the number of games to be added. When a winning area other than the winning areas “10” to “19” is determined by an internal lottery process described later, the number of games that can be played in the AT state is not added.

(Program start processing by the main control board 300)
Next, a program start process performed by the main control board 300 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the program start process is a process performed based on the power switch 511sw being turned on.

(Step S1)
In step S1, the main CPU 301 performs an initial setting process. Specifically, a table address for setting the internal register of the gaming machine 1 is set, and a process of setting the register address is performed based on the table. Then, when the process of step S1 ends, the process proceeds to step S2.

(Step S2)
In step S2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the setting change switch is ON. Here, in the present embodiment, the setting change switch 37sw is turned on by rotating a predetermined angle while a setting changing key (not shown) is inserted into the keyhole. Therefore, in step S2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the setting change key (not shown) is rotated by a predetermined angle in a state where the key is inserted into the keyhole. If it is determined that the setting change switch is ON (step S2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S3. If it is determined that the setting change switch is OFF (step S2 = No) ), The process proceeds to step S5.

(Step S3)
In step S3, the main CPU 301 performs a setting change process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 switches the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 36 based on the detection of the operation of the setting change button 37 by the setting change switch 37sw, or the start switch 10sw is a start lever. Based on the detection of the ten operations, the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 36 is confirmed. Then, when the process of step S3 ends, the process proceeds to step S4.

(Step S4)
In step S4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a setting change command. Specifically, a process of setting a setting change command having information related to the setting value determined in step S 3 in an effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. Then, when the process of step S4 ends, the process proceeds to the main loop process of FIG.

(Step S5)
In step S5, the main CPU 301 performs a power interruption recovery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 displays the saved register value and the saved stack pointer value when power supply is started after the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off. Perform processing to restore. In the power interruption recovery process, an initialization process of the main RAM 303 is performed. Then, when the process of step S5 ends, the process proceeds to the main loop process of FIG.

(Main loop processing)
Next, the main loop process will be described with reference to FIG.

(Step S101)
In step S101, the main CPU 301 performs an initialization process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a stack pointer and initializing the main RAM 303. Note that the process of step S101 is an initialization process performed for each game. Then, when the process of step S101 ends, the process proceeds to step S102.

(Step S102)
In step S102, the main CPU 301 performs a game start management process. Specifically, a process for clearing the payout number and a process for setting the current gaming state are performed. Then, when the process of step S102 ends, the process proceeds to step S103.

(Step S103)
In step S103, the main CPU 301 performs an overflow display process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 pays out via the relay board 200 based on the fact that the auxiliary storage unit full tank sensor 530s detects that a predetermined number of medals are stored in the auxiliary storage unit 530. A process of displaying a predetermined error by the number display 27 is performed. Then, when the process of step S103 ends, the process proceeds to step S104.

(Step S104)
In step S104, the main CPU 301 performs medal acceptance start processing. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of permitting the reception of medals when the re-game is not operating. Then, when the process of step S104 ends, the process proceeds to step S105.

(Step S105)
In step S105, the main CPU 301 performs medal management processing. In the processing, the main CPU 301 performs processing for checking whether or not a medal has been inserted into the medal insertion slot 6. Then, when the process of step S105 ends, the process proceeds to step S106.

(Step S106)
In step S106, the main CPU 301 performs a start lever check process, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the start switch 10sw is ON. Then, when the process of step S106 ends, the process proceeds to step S107.

(Step S107)
In step S107, the main CPU 301 performs an internal lottery process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining a winning area by lottery. Then, when the process of step S107 ends, the process proceeds to step S108.

(Step S108)
In step S108, the main CPU 301 performs a symbol code setting process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the main CPU 301 performs processing for updating a carry flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 and the like. Then, when the process of step S108 ends, the process proceeds to step S109.

(Step S109)
In step S109, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a reel rotation start acceptance command. Specifically, a process of setting a reel rotation start acceptance command having information related to the winning area determined in step S107 in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. Then, when the process of step S109 ends, the process proceeds to step S110.

(Step S110)
In step S110, the main CPU 301 performs a reel rotation start preparation process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process for setting a minimum one game time. Then, when the process of step S110 ends, the process proceeds to step S111.

(Step S111)
In step S111, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a stop table selection table. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a stop table selection table (see FIGS. 17 to 22) based on the winning area determined by the internal lottery process in step S107. Then, when the process of step S111 ends, the process proceeds to step S112.

(Step S112)
In step S112, the main CPU 301 performs a reel rotation start process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting data for rotating the reel 17 at a constant speed by driving the stepping motors 101, 102, and 103 via the reel control board 100. Then, when the process of step S112 ends, the process proceeds to step S113.

(Step S113)
In step S113, the main CPU 301 performs a reel rotation process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the main CPU 301 performs control to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel 17 based on the fact that the stop switches 11sw, 12sw, and 13sw detect a stop operation on the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 by the player. . Then, when the process of step S113 ends, the process proceeds to step S114.

(Step S114)
In step S114, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not there is a reel stop request. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process for determining whether or not an operation of the stop buttons 11, 12, 13 is detected by the stop switches 11 sw, 12 sw, 13 sw. If it is determined that there is a reel stop request (step S114 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S115. If it is determined that there is no reel stop request (step S114 = No), The process proceeds to step S116.

(Step S115)
In step S115, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a reel stop command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 detects information regarding the type of the reel 17 that has stopped, and the stop switches 11sw, 12sw, and 13sw detected a stop operation on the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 by the player with respect to the sub-control board 400. In order to transmit the reel stop command having the information related to the symbol position at the time of the operation and the information related to the symbol code corresponding to the symbol position, a process of setting the reel stop command in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 303 is performed. Do. Then, when the process of step S115 ends, the process proceeds to step S116.

(Step S116)
In step S116, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not all reels have been stopped. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not all of the reels 17 rotated by the reel rotation start process in step S110 have been stopped by operating the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13. If it is determined that all reels have been stopped (step S116 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S117. If it is determined that any of the reels has not been stopped (step S116 = No), the process proceeds to step S113.

(Step S117)
In step S117, the main CPU 301 performs display determination processing which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of calculating the number of payouts according to the winning symbol combination. Then, when the process of step S117 ends, the process proceeds to step S118.

(Step S118)
In step S118, the main CPU 301 performs a payout process. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of paying out medals by driving the hopper 520 via the power supply substrate 500. Then, when the process of step S118 ends, the process proceeds to step S119.

(Step S119)
In step S119, the main CPU 301 performs a game state transition process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of shifting the gaming state based on the combination of symbols displayed on the active line. When the process of step S119 ends, the process proceeds to step S101, and the main loop process is repeatedly executed.

(Start lever check processing)
Next, based on FIG. 46, the start lever check process performed by the process of step S106 of FIG. 45 will be described. FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a subroutine of start lever check processing.

(Step S106-1)
In step S106-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the start switch is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether the value of the medal insertion number storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is “3”, or (b) the re-game in-operation flag provided in the main RAM 303. When the re-game in-operation flag in the storage area is ON, (a) in the RT0 gaming state or the RT1 gaming state, when “3” medals are inserted into the medal slot 6, (b) MB gaming state When “2” medals are inserted into the medal slot 6, (c) in the RT0 gaming state or the RT1 gaming state, the number of stored medals is “3” or more and the BET button When the number of inserted coins becomes “3” due to the operations of 7 and 8, (d) in the MB gaming state, the number of stored medals is “2” or more. When the number of inserted sheets is “2” due to the operation of the BET buttons 7 and 8, (e) when the combination of symbols related to “Replay” is displayed on the active line, Processing is performed to determine whether or not the start switch 10sw has detected an operation of the start lever 10 by the player. If it is determined that the start switch is ON (step S106-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S106-2, and if it is determined that the start switch is not ON (step S106). -1 = No), the process of step S106-1 is repeatedly executed until the start switch is turned on.

(Step S106-2)
In step S106-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the re-game in-operation flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the value of the re-game operating flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S106-2 is completed, the start lever check process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S107 of the main loop process.

(Internal lottery process)
Next, the internal lottery process performed by the process of step S107 of FIG. 45 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a subroutine of internal lottery processing.

(Step S107-1)
In step S107-1, the main CPU 301 performs a hard random number acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for extracting a random number value generated by the random number generator 304. Here, when the main CPU 301 extracts the random number value generated by the random number generator 304, the main CPU 301 performs a process of storing it in the winning area determination random value storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S107-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S107-2.

(Step S107-2)
In step S107-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a gaming state based on the value of the gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S107-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S107-3.

(Step S107-3)
In step S107-3, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not it is in the MB gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the current gaming state is the MB gaming state based on the value of the gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the game state is the MB game state (step S107-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S107-4. If it is determined that the game state is not the MB game state (step S107-3). = No), the process proceeds to step S107-5.

(Step S107-4)
In step S107-4, the main CPU 301 performs MB game state time data storage processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of storing information indicating that winning of “confirmation items 01 to 19” and “follow roles 01 to 02” is permitted in a winning area storage area provided in the main RAM 303. . When the process of step S107-4 is completed, the internal lottery process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S108 of the main loop process.

(Step S107-5)
In step S107-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring the number of lotteries. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring the number of lotteries based on the gaming state acquired by the gaming state acquisition processing in step S107-2. Here, in this embodiment, the main CPU 301 obtains “34” as the number of lotteries regardless of the value of the game state storage area provided in the main RAM 303, and is provided in the main RAM 303. Processing to store in the lottery count storage area is performed. Then, when the process of step S107-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S107-6.

(Step S107-6)
In step S107-6, the main CPU 301 performs a lottery data acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring a lottery value in the winning area corresponding to the current number of lotteries. For example, when the set value is “1” and the number of lotteries is “10”, the lottery value “512” related to “middle bell” is acquired. When the set value is “1” and the number of lotteries is “11”, the lottery value “850” related to “obliquely aligned bell” is acquired. Then, when the process of step S107-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S107-7.

(Step S107-7)
In step S107-7, the main CPU 301 performs calculation update processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 corresponds to the current number of lotteries acquired by the process of step S107-6 from the random number value stored in the winning area determination random value storage area provided in the main RAM 303. The process of subtracting the lottery value of the winning area to be performed is performed, and the process of updating the value of the random number stored in the winning area determining random value storage area provided in the main RAM 303 to the value obtained by the subtraction is performed. . Then, when the process of step S107-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S107-8.

(Step S107-8)
In step S107-8, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value stored in the winning area determination random value storage area of the main RAM 303 is a negative value. And when it determines with having been won (step S107-8 = Yes), a process is transferred to step S107-9. On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning is not made (step S107-8 = No), the process proceeds to step S107-10.

(Step S107-9)
In step S107-9, the main CPU 301 performs data storage processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of storing the winning area determined to have been won by the process of step S107-8 in a winning area storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S107-9 ends, the internal lottery process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S108 of the main loop process.

(Step S107-10)
In step S107-10, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the number of lotteries. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value stored in the lottery count storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S107-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S107-11.

(Step S107-11)
In step S107-11, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of lotteries is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 subtracts “1” from the value stored in the lottery count storage area provided in the main RAM 303 by the process of step S107-10, and as a result, the value of the lottery count storage area is A process of determining whether or not “0” has been reached is performed. If it is determined that the number of lotteries is “0” (step S107-11 = Yes), the internal lottery process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S108 of the main loop process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of lotteries is not “0” (step S107-11 = No), the process proceeds to step S107-6.

  In this embodiment, when the number of lotteries is “0” (step S107-9 = YES), “00” “losing” is determined as the winning area.

(Design code setting process)
Next, the symbol code setting process performed by the process of step S108 of FIG. 45 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a subroutine of symbol code setting processing.

(Step S108-1)
In step S108-1, the main CPU 301 performs a winning area acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of loading the data stored by the process of step S107-7 of the internal winning process (see FIG. 47). Then, when the process of step S108-1 is completed, the process proceeds to step S108-2.

(Step S108-2)
In step S <b> 108-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process for determining whether or not the MB is won. Specifically, based on the data loaded by the process of step S108-1, a process for determining whether or not data related to the MB is stored is performed. If it is determined that the MB is won (step S108-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S108-3, and if it is determined that the MB is not won (step S108-2). = No), the process proceeds to step S108-5.

(Step S108-3)
In step S108-3, the main CPU 301 performs a carry flag storage area update process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs an AND operation on the data stored in step S107-7 of the internal winning process (see FIG. 47) and bonus check data (not shown), and the operation result is obtained. Processing to store in a carry flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. Then, when the process of step S108-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S108-4.

(Step S108-4)
In step S108-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the RT1 gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for storing information relating to the RT1 gaming state in a gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S108-4 is completed, the symbol code setting process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S109 of the main loop process.

(Step S108-5)
In step S108-5, the main CPU 301 performs MB flag setting processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs an exclusive OR operation between the value of the winning area storage area provided in the main RAM 303 and the value of the carry flag storage area, and the calculation result is provided in the main RAM 303. Processing to store in the winning area storage area. When the process of step S108-5 ends, the symbol code setting process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S109 of the main loop process.

(Reel rotation start preparation process)
Next, based on FIG. 49, the reel rotation start preparation process performed by the process of step S110 of FIG. 45 will be described. FIG. 49 shows a subroutine for reel rotation start preparation processing.

(Step S110-1)
In step S110-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a minimum one game time has elapsed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the timer counter set by the process of step S110-2 described later has become “0” in the previous game. When it is determined that the minimum one game time has elapsed (step S110-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-2, and when it is determined that the minimum one game time has not elapsed. (Step S110-1 = No), the process of step S110-1 is repeatedly executed until the minimum one game time elapses.

(Step S110-2)
In step S110-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a minimum one game time. Specifically, the main CPU 301 does not spend less than the minimum one game time from the process of step S110-2 in the current game to the process of step S110-2 in the next game in order to suppress gambling for the game. As described above, a process of setting the minimum one game time in the timer counter is performed. Here, in the present embodiment, the minimum one game time is about “4.1” seconds. Then, when the process of step S110-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-3.

(Step S110-3)
In step S110-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a constant speed rotation waiting time. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a waiting time until the rotation speed of the reel 17 reaches a constant speed. Then, when the process of step S110-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-4.

(Step S110-4)
In step S110-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a reel rotation start command. Specifically, in order for the main CPU 301 to transmit a reel rotation start command having information indicating that the rotation of the reel 17 is started to the sub-control board 400, the reel rotation start command is sent to the effect of the main RAM 303. To set in the transmission data storage area. When the process of step S110-4 is completed, the reel rotation start preparation process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S111 of the main loop process.

(Processing during reel rotation)
Next, based on FIG. 50, the reel rotation process performed by the process of step S113 of FIG. 45 will be described. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a subroutine of reel rotation processing.

(Step S113-1)
In step S113-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the stop button is pressed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the stop switches 11sw, 12sw, and 13sw have detected the operation of the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 by the player. If it is determined that the stop button has been pressed (step S113-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S113-2, and if it is determined that the stop button has not been pressed (step S113). -1 = No), the reel rotation process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S114 of the main loop process.

(Step S113-2)
In step S113-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing reel information acquisition processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 stops the stop switch 11sw, 12sw, 13sw depending on which stop button 11, 12, 13 of the stop buttons 11, 12, 13 that are effective for the stop operation is detected. A process for acquiring a reel to be controlled is performed. Then, when the process of step S113-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S113-3.

(Step S113-3)
In step S113-3, the main CPU 301 performs a pressing reference position acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 acquires the pressing reference position based on the target reel 17 and the counter value of the pulses supplied to the stepping motors 101, 102, 103, and is provided in the main RAM 303. A process of storing in the pressing reference position storage area is performed. Then, when the process of step S113-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S113-4.

(Step S113-4)
In step S113-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a reference table. Specifically, the main CPU 301 has (a) a stop table selection table set by the process of step S111, and (b) a target for performing the stop control process acquired by the process reel information acquisition process of step S113-2. And (c) a process of setting a reference table based on the value stored in the stop position storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S113-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S113-5.

(Step S113-5)
In step S113-5, the main CPU 301 performs a sliding frame number acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring the number of sliding frames based on the reference table set by the process of step S113-4. Then, when the process of step S113-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S113-6.

(Step S113-6)
In step S113-6, the main CPU 301 performs a stop position storage process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the stop position based on the pressing reference position acquired by the pressing reference position acquisition process in step S113-3 and the sliding frame number acquired by the sliding frame number acquisition process in step S113-5. And processing for storing the stop position in a stop position storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. Then, when the process of step S113-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S113-7.

(Step S113-7)
In step S113-7, the main CPU 301 performs a reel stop process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 obtains the pressing reference position acquired by the pressing reference position acquisition process in step S113-3, the sliding frame number acquired by the sliding frame number acquisition process in step S113-5, and the step S113-6. Based on the stop position stored by the stop position storage process, a process of stopping the reel that is the target of the stop control process is performed. When the process of step S113-7 is completed, the subroutine for the reel rotation process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S114 of the main loop process.

(Display judgment processing)
Next, based on FIG. 51, the display determination process performed by the process of step S117 of FIG. 45 is demonstrated. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a subroutine of display determination processing.

(Step S117-1)
In step S117-1, the main CPU 301 performs display determination error detection processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether the combination of symbols displayed on the active line is not abnormal based on the winning area determined by the internal lottery process and the combination of symbols displayed on the active line. Judgment is made. Then, when the process of step S117-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-2.

(Step S117-2)
In step S117-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not a display determination error has been detected. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not an abnormality is detected by the display determination error detection processing in step S117-1. If it is determined that a display determination error has been detected (step S117-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S117-3, and if it is determined that a display determination error has not been detected ( Step S117-2 = No), the process proceeds to step S117-5.

(Step S117-3)
In step S117-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a display determination error command. Specifically, in order for the main CPU 301 to transmit a display determination error command having information related to the display determination error to the sub control board 400, the display determination error command is stored in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 303. Perform the setting process. Then, when the process of step S117-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-4.

(Step S117-4)
In step S117-4, the main CPU 301 performs a display determination error detection process. Specifically, since the main CPU 301 determines that a display determination error has been detected in the process of step S117-2 (step S117-2 = Yes), the main CPU 301 enters a winning area that has not been determined by the internal lottery process. Since the combination of symbols is displayed on the active line, a display determination error detection process is performed to make it impossible to recover from the error state. When the process of step S117-4 ends, the process ends without returning to the main loop process of FIG.

(Step S117-5)
In step S117-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not replay display is in progress. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a symbol combination related to “replay” is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that the replay display is being performed (step S117-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S117-6, and if it is determined that the replay display is not being performed (step S117-5). = No), the process proceeds to step S117-8.

(Step S117-6)
In step S117-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a re-game operation command. Specifically, in order for the main CPU 301 to transmit to the sub-control board 400 a re-game operation command having information that a combination of symbols related to re-game is displayed on the active line, Processing for setting the command in the transmission data storage area for rendering in the main RAM 303 is performed. Then, when the process of step S117-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-7.

(Step S117-7)
In step S117-7, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the re-game operating flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the re-game in-operation flag in the re-game in-operation flag storage area of the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S117-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-13.

(Step S117-8)
In step S117-8, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a winning symbol is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a combination of symbols related to winning is displayed on the active line. When it is determined that a winning symbol is displayed (step S117-8 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S117-9, and when it is determined that a winning symbol is not displayed (step S117). −8 = No), the process proceeds to step S117-13.

(Step S117-9)
In step S117-9, the main CPU 301 performs an effective line number acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring “1” that is the number of effective lines of the gaming machine 1. Then, when the process of step S117-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-10.

(Step S117-10)
In step S117-10, the main CPU 301 performs a payout number calculation process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of calculating the payout number based on a combination of symbols related to winnings displayed on the active line and a symbol combination table (see FIGS. 9 to 12). Then, when the process of step S117-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-11.

(Step S117-11)
In step S117-11, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the process for the number of valid lines has been completed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the payout number has been calculated by the payout number calculation process in step S117-10 for the number of effective lines acquired in the effective line number acquisition process in step S117-9. Do. If it is determined that the processing for the number of effective lines has been completed (step S117-11 = Yes), the processing proceeds to step S117-12, and it is determined that the processing for the number of effective lines has not been completed. If it is determined (step S117-11 = No), the process proceeds to step S117-9, and the same process is repeatedly executed until the process for the number of valid lines is completed.

  In the present embodiment, since the number of effective lines is “1”, it is not determined that the processing for the number of effective lines is not completed (step S117-11 = No).

(Step S117-12)
In step S117-12, the main CPU 301 performs processing for confirming the payout number. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the maximum payout number per game has been exceeded. Here, in this embodiment, the maximum payout number per game is “9”. Then, when the process of step S117-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-13.

(Step S117-13)
In step S117-13, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a display determination command. Specifically, in order for the main CPU 301 to transmit a display determination command having information related to the combination of symbols displayed on the effective line to the sub-control board 400, the display determination command is used for effects in the main RAM 303. Performs processing to set in the transmission data storage area. When the process of step S117-13 ends, the display determination process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S118 of the main loop process.

(Game state transition process)
Next, based on FIG. 52, the game state transition process performed by the process of step S119 of FIG. 45 will be described. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the game state transition process.

(Step S119-1)
In step S119-1, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not it is in the MB gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the current gaming state is the MB gaming state based on the value of the gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the game state is the MB gaming state (step S119-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-2. If it is determined that the game state is not the MB gaming state (step S119-1). = No), the process proceeds to step S119-3.

(Step S119-2)
In step S119-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process during MB operation, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the MB gaming state end condition is satisfied, and performs processing to shift from the MB gaming state to the RT0 gaming state when the MB gaming state end condition is satisfied. . When the process of step S119-2 is completed, the gaming state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Step S119-3)
In step S119-3, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not it is in the RT1 gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the current gaming state is the RT1 gaming state based on the value of the gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When it is determined that the RT1 gaming state is set (step S119-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-4, and when it is determined that the RT1 gaming state is not set (step S119-3). = No), the game state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Step S119-4)
In step S119-4, the main CPU 301 determines whether an MB is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the symbol combination related to “MB” is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that the MB is displayed (step S119-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-5. If it is determined that the MB is not displayed (step S119-4). = No), the game state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Step S119-5)
In step S119-5, the main CPU 301 performs MB operation processing which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of shifting from the RT1 gaming state to the MB gaming state. Then, when the process of step S119-5 is completed, the gaming state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Processing during MB operation)
Next, based on FIG. 53, the MB operation process performed by the process of step S119-2 of FIG. 52 will be described. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing during MB operation.

(Step S119-2-1)
In step S119-2-1, the main CPU 301 performs a payout number counter subtraction process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting a value corresponding to the number of medals paid out by the process of step S118 from the value of the payout number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-2-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-2-2.

(Step S119-2-2)
In step S119-2-2, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the payout number counter is less than “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 subtracts a value corresponding to the number of medals paid out by the process of step S116 from the value of the payout number counter provided in the main RAM 303 by the process of step S119-2-2. As a result, it is determined whether or not the value of the payout number counter provided in the main RAM 303 has become a negative value. If it is determined that the value of the payout number counter is less than “0” (step S119-2-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-2-3, and the value of the payout number counter is When it is determined that it is not less than “0” (step S119-2-2 = No), the subroutine of the MB operating process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Step S119-2-3)
In step S119-2-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the RT0 gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for storing information relating to the RT0 gaming state in a gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-2-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-2-4.

(Step S119-2-4)
In step S119-2-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting an MB end command. Specifically, an MB end command having information indicating that the MB gaming state has ended is set in an effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-2-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-2-5.

(Step S119-2-5)
In step S119-2-5, the main CPU 301 performs initialization processing at the end of MB. Specifically, a process of setting the value of the payout number counter provided in the main RAM 303 to “0” is performed. When the process of step S119-2-5 is completed, the subroutine for the MB operating process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Process during MB operation)
Next, based on FIG. 54, the MB operation time process performed by the process of step S119-5 of FIG. 52 will be described. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the MB operation time process.

(Step S119-5-1)
In step S119-5-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the MB gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for storing information relating to the MB gaming state in a gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-5-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-5-2.

(Step S119-5-2)
In step S119-5-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “28” to the value of the payout number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “28” to the value of the payout number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-5-2 is completed, the process proceeds to step S119-5-3.

(Step S119-5-3)
In step S119-5-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing the carry flag storage area. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing a carry flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-5-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-5-4.

(Step S119-5-4)
In step S119-5-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting an MB start command. Specifically, processing for setting an MB start command having information indicating the transition to the MB gaming state or the like in an effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. When the process of step S119-5-4 is completed, the subroutine for the MB operation process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Interrupt processing)
Next, interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the interrupt process is a process performed by interrupting the main loop process every “1.49 ms”.

(Step S201)
In step S <b> 201, the main CPU 301 performs processing for saving a register. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for saving the value of the register used at the time of step S201. Then, when the process of step S201 ends, the process proceeds to step S202.

(Step S202)
In step S202, the main CPU 301 performs input port read processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for receiving signals from the reel control board 100, the relay board 200, and the power supply board 500 through the I / F circuit 305. Then, when the process of step S202 ends, the process proceeds to step S203.

(Step S203)
In step S203, the main CPU 301 performs timer measurement processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the timer counter for measuring the minimum one game time or the like. Then, when the process of step S203 ends, the process proceeds to step S204.

(Step S204)
In step S204, the main CPU 301 performs a reel drive control process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 drives the stepping motors 101, 102, and 103 via the reel control board 100, thereby performing acceleration, constant speed, deceleration control, and the like of the reel 17. Then, when the process of step S204 ends, the process proceeds to step S205.

(Step S205)
In step S205, the main CPU 301 performs external signal output processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of outputting a signal to the external concentration terminal board 38. Then, when the process of step S205 ends, the process proceeds to step S206.

(Step S206)
In step S206, the main CPU 301 performs LED display processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 controls the light emission of the start lamp 23, the BET lamp 24, the stored number display unit 25, the game state display lamp 26, the payout number display unit 27, the throw-in possible display lamp 28, and the re-game display lamp 29. I do. Then, when the process of step S206 ends, the process proceeds to step S207.

(Step S207)
In step S207, the main CPU 301 performs control command transmission processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for transmitting various commands set in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 to the sub-control board 400. Then, when the process of step S207 ends, the process proceeds to step S208.

(Step S208)
In step S208, the main CPU 301 performs a register restoration process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of restoring the saved register value in the process of step S201. Then, when the process of step S208 ends, the interrupt process ends, and the process returns to the main loop process.

(Main processing on sub-control board)
Next, the main process in the sub control board will be described with reference to FIG. The main process in the sub control board is a process performed based on the power switch 511sw being turned on.

(Step S301)
In step S301, the sub CPU 402 performs an initialization process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing such as error checking of the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S301 ends, the process proceeds to step S302.

(Step S302)
In step S302, the sub CPU 402 performs main board communication processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for analyzing a command transmitted from the main control board 300 and the like. Then, when the process of step S302 ends, the process proceeds to step S303.

(Step S303)
In step S303, the sub CPU 402 performs sound control processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of outputting sound from the speakers 34 and 35 via the amplifier control board 440 based on the effect content determined by the effect determination process described later. Then, when the process of step S303 ends, the process proceeds to step S304.

(Step S304)
In step S304, the sub CPU 402 performs lamp control processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402, based on the effect content determined by the effect determination process described later, via the effect control board 410, the side lamp 5, the effect lamp 22, the stop operation order display lamp 30, and the start The lever effect lamp 42 is controlled. Further, the sub CPU 402 controls the effect device 44 via the effect control board 410 and the drive board 43 based on the effect contents determined by the effect determination process described later. Then, when the process of step S304 ends, the process proceeds to step S305.

(Step S305)
In step S305, the sub CPU 402 performs image control processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 controls the liquid crystal display device 46 via the effect control board 410 and the general-purpose board 45 based on the effect contents determined by the effect determination process described later. Then, when the process of step S305 ends, the process proceeds to step S306.

(Step S306)
In step S306, the sub CPU 402 performs various switch detection processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 detects (a) processing executed when the effect button detection switch 18sw detects the operation of the effect button 18, and (b) the cross key detection switch 19sw detects the operation of the cross key 19. The process to be executed when it is done. Then, when the process of step S306 ends, the process proceeds to step S302.

(Main board communication processing)
Next, the main board communication process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a diagram showing a subroutine of main board communication processing.

(Step S302-1)
In step S302-1, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not a different command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the command transmitted from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300 is a command different from the previously transmitted command. If it is determined that a different command has been received (step S302-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-2. If it is determined that a different command has not been received (step S302). −1 = No), the main board communication process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Step S302-2)
In step S302-2, the sub CPU 402 performs a game information storage process. Specifically, since the command transmitted from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300 is a command different from the command transmitted last time, the sub CPU 402 is based on a command different from the command transmitted last time. Processing for creating game information and storing it in a predetermined storage area of the sub-RAM 405 is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3.

(Step S302-3)
In step S302-3, the sub CPU 402 performs a command analysis process that will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 402 executes a process based on the game information stored by the process of step S302-2. When the process of step S302-3 ends, the main board communication process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Command analysis processing)
Next, command analysis processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a subroutine of command analysis processing.

(Step S302-3-1)
In step S302-3-1, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not a power-on command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the command stored by the game information storage process of step S302-2 is a power-on command. If it is determined that the power-on command has been received (step S302-3-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-2, and it is determined that the power-on command has not been received. In this case (step S302-3-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-3.

(Step S302-3-2)
In step S302-3-2, the sub CPU 402 performs a power-on command reception process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining the content of the effect at the time of power-on based on information included in the received power-on command. When the process of step S302-3-2 ends, the command analysis process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Step S302-3-3)
In step S302-3-3, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not a setting change command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the command stored by the game information storage process of step S302-2 is a setting change command. If it is determined that the setting change command has been received (step S302-3-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-4, and it is determined that the setting change command has not been received. In this case (step S302-3-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-5.

(Step S302-3-4)
In step S302-3-4, the sub CPU 402 performs a setting change command reception process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining the content of the effect at the time of setting change based on the information included in the received setting change command. With this processing, the sub CPU 402 determines an effect to display the image data indicating that the setting is being changed on the liquid crystal display device 46, or an effect to display the image data indicating that the setting change has been completed. Control. When the process of step S302-3-4 ends, the command analysis process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Step S302-3-5)
In step S302-3-5, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not a reel rotation start acceptance command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the command stored by the game information storage process of step S302-2 is a reel rotation start acceptance command. If it is determined that the reel rotation start acceptance command has been received (step S302-3-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6, and the reel rotation start acceptance command has not been received. Is determined (step S302-3-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-7.

(Step S302-3-6)
In step S302-3-6, the sub CPU 402 performs a reel rotation start acceptance command reception process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining the contents of effects based on the information included in the received reel rotation start acceptance command. When the process of step S302-3-6 ends, the command analysis process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Step S302-3-7)
In step S302-3-7, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not a reel rotation start command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the command stored by the game information storage process of step S302-2 is a reel rotation start command. If it is determined that the reel rotation start command has been received (step S302-3-7 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-8, and it is determined that the reel rotation start command has not been received. If it is determined (step S302-3-7 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-9.

(Step S302-3-8)
In step S302-3-8, the sub CPU 402 performs a reel rotation start command reception process. In the processing, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining the content of the effect at the start of reel rotation based on the information included in the received reel rotation start command. When the process of step S302-3-8 ends, the command analysis process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Step S302-3-9)
In step S302-3-9, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not a reel stop command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the command stored by the game information storage process of step S302-2 is a reel stop command. If it is determined that the reel stop command has been received (step S302-3-9 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-10, and it is determined that the reel stop command has not been received. In this case (step S302-3-9 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-11.

(Step S302-3-10)
In step S302-3-10, the sub CPU 402 performs a reel stop command reception process. In the process, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining the content of the effect based on the information included in the received reel stop command. When the process of step S302-3-10 ends, the command analysis process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Step S302-3-11)
In step S302-3-11, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not a display determination command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the command stored by the game information storage process of step S302-2 is a display determination command. If it is determined that the display determination command has been received (step S302-3-11 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12, and it is determined that the display determination command has not been received. In this case (step S302-3-11 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-13.

(Step S302-3-12)
In step S302-3-12, the sub CPU 402 performs a display determination command reception process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the process, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining the contents of the effect when winning or the like is established based on the information included in the received display determination command. When the process of step S302-3-12 ends, the command analysis process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Step S302-3-13)
In step S302-3-13, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not a gaming state command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the command stored by the game information storage process of step S302-2 is a game state command. If it is determined that a gaming state command has been received (step S302-3-13 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-14, and it is determined that no gaming state command has been received. In this case (step S302-3-13 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-15.

(Step S302-3-14)
In step S302-3-14, the sub CPU 402 performs a game state command reception process. In the process, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining the content of the effect based on the information included in the received gaming state command. When the process of step S302-3-14 ends, the command analysis process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Step S302-3-15)
In step S302-3-15, the sub CPU 402 performs control to execute processing according to the received command. In this process, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining the content of the effect based on the command stored by the game information storage process of step S302-2. When the process of step S302-3-15 ends, the command analysis process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Reel rotation start acceptance command reception processing)
Next, the reel rotation start acceptance command reception process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing at the time of receiving a reel rotation start acceptance command.

(Step S302-3-6-1)
In step S302-3-6-1, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the state number is “01”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the state number is “01” based on a value stored in a state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the state number is “01” (step S302-3-6-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-2, and the state number is “01”. If it is determined that it is not (step S302-3-6-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-3.

(Step S302-3-6-2)
In step S302-3-6-2, the sub CPU 402 performs normal state processing which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the bonus preparation state transition game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405. When the process of step S302-3-6-2 is completed, the subroutine for the reel rotation start acceptance command reception process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process on the sub control board.

(Step S302-3-6-3)
In step S302-3-6-3, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the state number is “02”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the state number is “02” based on the value stored in the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the state number is “02” (step S302-3-6-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-4, and the state number is “02”. If it is determined that it is not (step S302-3-6-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-5.

(Step S302-3-6-4)
In step S302-3-6-4, the sub CPU 402 performs a chance state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the bonus preparation state transition game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405. When the process of step S302-3-6-4 is completed, the subroutine for the reel rotation start acceptance command reception process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Step S302-3-6-5)
In step S302-3-6-5, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the state number is “03”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the state number is “03” based on the value stored in the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the state number is “03” (step S302-3-6-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-6, and the state number is “03”. If it is determined that it is not (step S302-3-6-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-7.

(Step S302-3-6-6)
In step S302-3-6-6, the sub CPU 402 performs a Bonus state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405. When the process of step S302-3-6-4 is completed, the subroutine for the reel rotation start acceptance command reception process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Step S302-3-6-7)
In step S302-3-6-7, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the state number is “04”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the state number is “04” based on the value stored in the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the state number is “04” (step S302-3-6-7 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-8, and the state number is “04”. If it is determined that it is not (step S302-3-6-7 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-9.

(Step S302-3-6-8)
In step S302-3-6-8, the sub CPU 402 performs AT state processing which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the AT state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405. When the process of step S302-3-6-8 is completed, the subroutine for the reel rotation start acceptance command reception process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process on the sub control board.

(Step S302-3-6-9)
In step S302-3-6-9, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the state number is “05”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the state number is “05” based on the value stored in the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the state number is “05” (step S302-3-6-9 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-10, and the state number is “05”. If it is determined that it is not (step S302-3-6-9 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-11.

(Step S302-3-6-10)
In step S302-3-6-10, the sub CPU 402 performs an additional state A process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of drawing whether or not to add an AT state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405. When the process of step S302-3-6-10 ends, the subroutine for the reel rotation start acceptance command reception process ends, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process on the sub control board.

(Step S302-3-6-11)
In step S302-3-6-11, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the state number is “06”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the state number is “06” based on the value stored in the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the state number is “06” (step S302-3-6-11 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-12, and the state number is “06”. If it is determined that it is not (step S302-3-6-11 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-13.

(Step S302-3-6-12)
In step S302-3-6-12, the sub CPU 402 performs an additional state B process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the added state B game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405. When the process of step S302-3-6-12 is completed, the subroutine for the reel rotation start acceptance command reception process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process on the sub control board.

(Step S302-3-6-13)
In step S302-3-6-13, the sub CPU 402 performs a Bonus preparation state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of drawing whether or not to add the value of the bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405. When the process of step S302-3-6-13 ends, the subroutine for the reel rotation start acceptance command reception process ends, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process on the sub control board.

(Normal processing)
Next, the normal state process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a diagram showing a subroutine for normal state processing.

(Step S302-3-6-2-1)
In step S302-3-6-2-1, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the Bonus preparation state transition game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the bonus preparation state transition game number counter stored in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-2-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-2-2.

(Step S302-3-6-2-2)
In step S302-3-6-2-2, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the Bonus preparation state transition game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 subtracts “1” from the value of the Bonus ready state transition game number counter in the process of Step S302-3-6-2-1, so that the value of the Bonus ready state transition game number counter is “ A process of determining whether or not “0” has been reached is performed. If it is determined that the value of the Bonus ready state transition game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-6-2-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-2-3. When the process is shifted and it is determined that the value of the Bonus ready state transition game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-6-2-2 = No), step S302-3-6-2 The processing is shifted to 4.

(Step S302-3-6-2-3)
In step S302-3-6-2-3, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “07” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to update the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 to “07”. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-2-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-2-11.

(Step S302-3-6-2-4)
In step S302-3-6-2-4, the sub CPU 402 performs a Bonus preparation state transition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 displays information related to the winning area included in the reel rotation start acceptance command transmitted from the main control board 300, and the normal state Bonus preparation state transition lottery table provided in the sub ROM 404. Based on (see FIG. 30), the lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the Bonus preparation state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-2-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-2-5.

(Step S302-3-6-2-5)
In step S302-3-6-2-5, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not it is determined to shift to the Bonus preparation state by the Bonus preparation state shift lottery process in Step S302-3-6-2-4. And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-6-2-5 = Yes), it transfers to a process to step S302-3-6-2-6, and it was determined with having not been won. In this case (step S302-3-6-2-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-2-11.

(Step S302-3-6-2-6)
In step S302-3-6-2-6, the sub CPU 402 performs an extra state B transition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a lottery process to determine whether or not to shift to the added state B based on the added state B shift lottery table provided in the sub ROM 404 (see FIG. 32). Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-2-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-2-7.

  As described above, when it is determined to shift to the Bonus preparation state, the player shifts to the addition state B by drawing whether or not to shift to the addition state B more advantageous than the Bonus preparation state. Since the game is performed while hoping for it, the interest in the game is improved.

(Step S302-3-6-2-7)
In step S302-3-6-2-7, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not to shift to the added state B is determined by the added state B shift lottery process in step S302-3-6-2-6. And when it determines with having been won (step S302-3-6-2-7 = Yes), it transfers to a process to step S302-3-6-2-8, and it was determined with having not been won. In this case (step S302-3-6-2-7 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-2-10.

(Step S302-3-6-2-8)
In step S302-3-6-2-8, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “06” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to update the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 to “06”. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-2-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-2-9.

(Step S302-3-6-2-9)
In step S302-3-6-2-9, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “20” to the value of the added state B game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “20” to the value of the added state B game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-2-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-2-11.

(Step S302-3-6-2-10)
In step S302-3-6-2-10, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “07” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to update the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 to “07”. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-2-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-2-11.

(Step S302-3-6-2-11)
In step S302-3-6-2-11, the sub CPU 402 performs an effect determination process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 stores the start lever operation effect determination table (for the normal state) (see FIG. 28A) provided in the sub ROM 404 and the game information storage process in step S302-2. Based on the information related to the selected winning area, a process for determining the production contents is performed. When the process of step S302-3-4-2-11 is completed, the normal state processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, the sub CPU 402 performs the start lever operation effect determination table (for the normal state) (see FIG. 28A) and the game information storage process in step S302-2. In addition to determining the presentation based on the stored information relating to the winning area, (b) the value of the progress mass counter provided in the sub RAM 405 and the map information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 The content of the effect is determined on the basis of the value stored in the value or the value of the continuous effect counter provided in the sub RAM 405.

  For example, when “definite cell” is stored in the value of the map information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405, the sub CPU 402 produces an effect that makes the player expect to shift to the Bonus preparation state. Perform the decision process. Thereby, the sub CPU 402 has a winning area where the information related to the winning area stored by the game information storing process of step S302-2 is advantageous for the player, or a winning area with a relatively low probability of being determined as the winning area. Even if it is not decided, it is possible to perform an effect that the player has a sense of expectation.

  Although specifically described in detail later, in the present embodiment, the sub CPU 402 is provided in the sub RAM 405 based on the fact that the symbol combination related to “normal replay” is displayed on the active line. When a combination of symbols related to “roulette replay” is displayed on the active line, based on the value of the progress mass counter provided in the sub-RAM 405 The process of updating the current location is performed. Further, the map information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 includes (a) a first map information storage area in which information related to a cell “1” ahead of the current location is stored, and (b) “2” from the current location. A second map information storage area in which information relating to the square ahead is stored; (c) a third map information storage area in which information relating to the square ahead of “3” from the current location is stored; and (d) a current location. To a fourth map information storage area in which information related to the square ahead of "4" square is stored.

  For this reason, in the first map information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405, information related to the “determined square” is stored, and the value of the progress mass counter provided in the sub RAM 405 is “1”. Is stored, the symbol combination related to “roulette replay” is displayed on the active line, and the “stop box” is stopped. Therefore, in this case, the sub CPU 402 can execute an effect that allows the player to have a sense of expectation.

  Further, in the above case, even when the combination of symbols related to “normal replay” is displayed and the value of the progress mass counter provided in the sub RAM 405 becomes “2”, “roulette replay” is displayed. If the value of the progress counter provided in the sub-RAM 405 is updated to “1” by displaying the symbol combination related to “normal replay” before the symbol combination is displayed, Since it is stopped at the “fixed cell”, the symbol combination related to “roulette replay” is displayed, and the expectation can be maintained until it cannot be stopped at the “fixed cell”.

  Further, in the above case, the symbol combination related to “normal replay” is displayed, the value of the progress mass counter provided in the sub RAM 405 is “2”, and the symbol combination related to “roulette replay” is displayed. Even if it is a case, since a map is newly created by the map creation process described later, the combination of symbols related to “roulette replay” is displayed, and it is not possible to stop at the “fixed square”. Even after that, you can have a sense of expectation.

(Chance state processing)
Next, the chance state process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a subroutine for normal state processing.

(Step S302-3-6-4-1)
In step S302-3-6-4-1, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the Bonus ready state transition game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the bonus preparation state transition game number counter stored in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-4-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-4-2.

(Step S302-3-6-4-2)
In step S302-3-6-4-2, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the Bonus preparation state transition game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 subtracts “1” from the value of the bonus ready state transition game number counter in the process of step S302-3-6-4-1, and as a result, the value of the bonus ready state transition game number counter is “ A process of determining whether or not “0” has been reached is performed. If it is determined that the value of the Bonus ready state transition game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-6-4-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-4-3. When the process is shifted and it is determined that the value of the Bonus ready state transition game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-6-4-2 = No), step S302-3-6-4- The processing is shifted to 4.

(Step S302-3-6-4-3)
In step S302-3-6-4-3, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “07” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to update the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 to “07”. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-4-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-4-7.

(Step S302-3-6-4-4)
In step S302-3-6-4-4, the sub CPU 402 performs a Bonus preparation state transition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 displays information related to the winning area included in the reel rotation start acceptance command transmitted from the main control board 300, and a chance state Bonus preparation state transition lottery table provided in the sub ROM 404. Based on (see FIG. 31), the lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the Bonus preparation state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-4-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-4-5.

(Step S302-3-6-4-5)
In step S302-3-6-4-5, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not it is determined to shift to the Bonus preparation state by the Bonus preparation state shift lottery process in Step S302-3-6-4-4. And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-6-4-5 = Yes), it transfers to a process to step S302-3-6-4-6, and it determined with having not been won. In this case (step S302-3-6-4-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-4-7.

(Step S302-3-6-4-6)
In step S302-3-6-4-6, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “07” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to update the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 to “07”. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-4-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-4-7.

(Step S302-3-6-4-7)
In step S302-3-6-4-7, the sub CPU 402 performs effect determination processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 stores the start lever operation stage effect determination table (for chance state) (see FIG. 28B) provided in the sub ROM 404 and the game information storage process in step S302-2. Based on the information related to the selected winning area, a process for determining the production contents is performed. When the process of step S302-3-4-4-7 ends, the chance state processing subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub-control board.

  Here, even in the chance state, the sub CPU 402 is stored in the value of the progress mass counter provided in the sub RAM 405 and the map information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405, as in the normal state processing. Based on the value and the value of the continuous effect counter provided in the sub RAM 405, processing for determining the effect content is performed. Thereby, the sub CPU 402 has a winning area where the information related to the winning area stored by the game information storing process of step S302-2 is advantageous for the player, or a winning area with a relatively low probability of being determined as the winning area. Even if it is not decided, it is possible to perform an effect that the player has a sense of expectation.

  In this embodiment, unlike the normal state process, the chance state process does not perform the extra state B transition lottery process, but is not limited thereto. For example, in the chance state process, the added state B transition lottery process may be performed as in the normal state process.

(Bonus state processing)
Next, the Bonus state process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the Bonus state process.

(Step S302-3-6-6-1)
In step S302-3-6-6-1, the sub CPU 402 performs a character acquisition lottery process to be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the process, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of drawing whether or not to acquire a character. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-6-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-6-2.

(Step S302-3-6-6-2)
In step S302-3-6-6-2, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not a character has been acquired by the character acquisition lottery process in step S302-3-6-6-1. And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-6-6-2 = Yes), it transfers to a process to step S302-3-6-6-3, and it determined with not having been won. In the case (step S302-3-6-6-2 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-6-4.

(Step S302-3-6-6-3)
In step S302-3-6-6-3, the sub CPU 402 performs character combination processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring another character based on the currently acquired character. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-6-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-6-4.

(Step S302-3-6-6-4)
In step S302-3-6-6-4, the sub CPU 402 performs a bonus state game number counter addition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 adds information related to the winning area included in the reel rotation start acceptance command transmitted from the main control board 300, and a bonus state game number counter added lottery table (provided in the sub ROM 404). Based on (see FIG. 42), the lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played in the Bonus state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-6-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-6-5.

(Step S302-3-6-6-5)
In step S302-3-6-6-5, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 sets the value determined by the bonus state game number counter addition lottery process in step S302-3-6-6-4 to the value of the bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405. A process for determining whether or not to determine whether to add to is performed. And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-6-6-5 = Yes), it transfers to a process to step S302-3-6-6-6, and it determines with not having been won. In this case (step S302-3-6-6-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-6-7.

(Step S302-3-6-6-6)
In step S302-3-6-6-6, the sub CPU 402 performs a bonus state game number counter addition process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 uses the Bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405 to determine the number of games determined by adding the Bonus state game number counter in step S302-3-6-6-4. The process of adding to the value and storing the value is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-6-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-6-7.

(Step S302-3-6-6-7)
In step S302-3-6-6-7, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the bonus state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-6-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-6-8.

(Step S302-3-6-6-8)
In step S302-3-6-6-8, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the Bonus state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 subtracts “1” from the value of the bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405 by the processing of step S302-3-6-6-7, and as a result, the bonus state game A process of determining whether or not the value of the number counter is “0” is performed. If it is determined that the value of the Bonus state game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-6-6-8 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-6-9. When it is determined that the value of the bonus state game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-6-6-8 = No), step S302-3-6-6-10 is performed. The process is transferred to.

(Step S302-3-6-6-9)
In step S302-3-6-6-9, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “04” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to update the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 to “04”. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-6-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-6-10.

(Step S302-3-6-6-10)
In step S302-3-6-6-10, the sub CPU 402 performs an effect determination process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 stores the start lever operation effect determination table (for the Bonus state) (see FIG. 28C) provided in the sub ROM 404 and the game information storage process in step S302-2. Based on the information related to the selected winning area, a process for determining the production contents is performed. When the process of step S302-3-4-6-10 ends, the subroutine for the Bonus state process ends, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

  Here, the sub CPU 402 (a) in the effect determination process of step S302-3-6-6-10, the start lever operation effect determination table (for the Bonus state) (see FIG. 28C), step In addition to determining the effect contents based on the information related to the winning area stored by the game information storage process of S302-2, (b) the character acquisition lottery process of step S302-3-6-6-1 The content of the effect is determined depending on whether or not a character has been acquired, and (c) whether or not another character has been acquired in the character combining process in step S302-3-6-6-3.

  In the Bonus state, unlike the normal state and the chance state, the sub CPU 402 is stored in the value of the progress mass counter provided in the sub RAM 405 and the map information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. The content of the production is not determined based on the value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even in the Bonus state, as in the normal state and the chance state, the value of the progress mass counter provided in the sub RAM 405 and the map information storage provided in the sub RAM 405 are stored. The content of the effect may be determined based on the value stored in the area.

(Character acquisition lottery process)
Next, the character acquisition lottery process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a subroutine of character acquisition lottery processing.

(Step S302-3-6-6-1-1)
In step S302-3-6-6-1-1, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the character A is stocked. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not information relating to the character A is stored based on the value of the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the character A is stocked (step S302-3-6-6-1-1 = YES), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-6-1-5. If it is determined that the character A is not stocked (step S302-3-6-6-1-1 = NO), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-6-1-2.

(Step S302-3-6-6-1-2)
In step S302-3-6-6-1-2, the sub CPU 402 performs a character A acquisition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a lottery process to determine whether or not to acquire the character A based on the character A acquisition lottery table (see FIG. 33A). Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-6-1-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-6-1-3.

(Step S302-3-6-6-1-3)
In step S <b> 302-3-6-6-1-3, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not it is determined to acquire the character A as a result of performing the character A acquisition lottery process in step S302-3-6-6-1-2. . And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-6-6-1-3 = YES), it transfers a process to step S302-3-6-6-1-4, and is not winning Is determined (step S302-3-6-6-1-3 = NO), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-6-1-5.

(Step S302-3-6-6-1-4)
In step S302-3-6-6-1-4, the sub CPU 402 performs character A storage processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for storing information related to the character A in a character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-6-1-4 ends, the character acquisition lottery process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-6-2 of the bonus state process.

  If the character acquisition lottery process is called from a character acquisition square stop process (see FIG. 75), which will be described later, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-7-2 of the character acquisition square stop process. Transition.

(Step S302-3-6-6-1-5)
In step S302-3-6-6-1-5, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the character B is stocked. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not information related to the character B is stored based on the value of the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that character B is stocked (step S302-3-6-6-1-5 = YES), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-6-1-9. If it is determined that the character B is not stocked (step S302-3-6-6-1-5 = NO), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-6-1-6.

(Step S302-3-6-6-1-6)
In step S302-3-6-6-1-6, the sub CPU 402 performs a character B acquisition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a lottery process to determine whether or not to acquire the character B based on the character B acquisition lottery table (see FIG. 33B). Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-6-1-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-6-1-7.

(Step S302-3-6-6-1-7)
In step S302-3-6-6-1-7, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not it is determined to acquire the character B as a result of performing the character B acquisition lottery process of step S302-3-6-6-1-6. . And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-6-6-1-7 = YES), a process is transferred to step S302-3-6-6-1-8, and it is not winning. Is determined (step S302-3-6-6-1-7 = NO), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-6-1-9.

(Step S302-3-6-6-1-8)
In step S302-3-6-6-1-8, the sub CPU 402 performs a character B storage process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for storing information relating to the character B in a character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. When the process of step S302-3-6-6-1-8 ends, the character acquisition lottery process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-6-2 of the bonus state process.

  If the character acquisition lottery process is called from a character acquisition square stop process (see FIG. 75), which will be described later, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-7-2 of the character acquisition square stop process. Transition.

(Step S302-3-6-6-1-9)
In step S302-3-6-6-1-9, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the character C is stocked. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not information related to the character C is stored based on the value of the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the character C is stocked (step S302-3-6-6-1-9 = YES), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-6-1-13. If it is determined that the character C is not stocked (step S302-3-6-6-1-9 = NO), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-6-1-10.

(Step S302-3-6-6-1-10)
In step S302-3-6-6-1-10, the sub CPU 402 performs a character C acquisition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of drawing whether or not to acquire the character C based on the character C acquisition lottery table (see FIG. 33C). Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-6-1-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-6-1-11.

(Step S302-3-6-6-11-1)
In step S302-3-6-6-1-11, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not it is determined to acquire the character C as a result of performing the character C acquisition lottery process in step S302-3-6-6-1-10. . And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-6-6-1-11 = YES), it transfers a process to step S302-3-6-6-1-12, and is not winning If it is determined (step S302-3-6-6-1-11 = NO), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-6-1-13.

(Step S302-3-6-6-1-12)
In step S302-3-6-6-1-12, the sub CPU 402 performs a character C storage process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for storing information relating to the character C in a character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. When the process of step S302-3-6-6-1-12 ends, the character acquisition lottery process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-6-2 of the bonus state process.

  If the character acquisition lottery process is called from a character acquisition square stop process (see FIG. 75), which will be described later, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-7-2 of the character acquisition square stop process. Transition.

(Step S302-3-6-6-1-13)
In step S302-3-6-6-1-13, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not the character D is stocked. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not information related to the character D is stored based on the value of the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the character D is stocked (step S302-3-6-6-1-13 = YES), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-6-1-17. If it is determined that the character D is not stocked (step S302-3-6-6-1-13 = NO), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-6-1-14.

(Step S302-3-6-6-1-14)
In step S302-3-6-6-1-14, the sub CPU 402 performs a character D acquisition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of drawing whether or not to acquire the character D based on the character D acquisition lottery table (see FIG. 33D). Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-6-1-14 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-6-1-15.

(Step S302-3-6-6-1-15)
In step S302-3-6-6-1-15, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not it is determined to acquire the character D as a result of performing the character D acquisition lottery process of step S302-3-6-6-1-14. . And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-6-6-1-15 = YES), it transfers a process to step S302-3-6-6-1-16, and is not winning Is determined (step S302-3-6-6-1-15 = NO), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-6-1-17.

(Step S302-3-6-6-1-16)
In step S302-3-6-6-1-16, the sub CPU 402 performs character D storage processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for storing information relating to the character D in a character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. When the process of step S302-3-6-6-1-16 ends, the character acquisition lottery process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-6-2 of the bonus state process.

  If the character acquisition lottery process is called from a character acquisition square stop process (see FIG. 75), which will be described later, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-7-2 of the character acquisition square stop process. Transition.

(Step S302-3-6-6-1-17)
In step S302-3-6-6-1-17, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the character E is stocked. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not information related to the character E is stored based on the value of the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the character E is not stocked (step S302-3-6-6-1-17 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-6-1-18. . On the other hand, if it is determined that the character E is stocked (step S302-3-6-6-1-17 = Yes), the character acquisition lottery processing subroutine is terminated, and the bonus state processing step S302- The process proceeds to 3-6-6-2.

  If the character acquisition lottery process is called from a character acquisition square stop process (see FIG. 75), which will be described later, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-7-2 of the character acquisition square stop process. Transition.

(Step S302-3-6-6-1-18)
In step S302-3-6-6-1-18, the sub CPU 402 performs a character E acquisition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of drawing whether or not to acquire the character E based on the character E acquisition lottery table (see FIG. 33E). Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-6-1-18 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-6-1-19.

(Step S302-3-6-6-1-19)
In step S302-3-6-6-1-19, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not it is determined to acquire the character E as a result of performing the character E acquisition lottery process in step S302-3-6-6-1-18. . And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-6-6-1-19 = YES), a process is transferred to step S302-3-6-6-1-20, and it is not winning. Is determined (step S302-3-6-6-1-19 = NO), the character acquisition lottery processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-6-2 of the Bonus state process. To migrate.

  If the character acquisition lottery process is called from a character acquisition square stop process (see FIG. 75), which will be described later, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-7-2 of the character acquisition square stop process. Transition.

(Step S302-3-6-6-1-20)
In step S302-3-6-6-1-20, the sub CPU 402 performs character E storage processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for storing information relating to the character E in a character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. When the process of step S302-3-6-6-1-20 ends, the character acquisition lottery process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-6-2 of the bonus state process.

  If the character acquisition lottery process is called from a character acquisition square stop process (see FIG. 75), which will be described later, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-7-2 of the character acquisition square stop process. Transition.

  In the present embodiment, a lottery for determining whether or not to acquire each character from character A to character E is performed. When it is determined to acquire a character, the character acquisition lottery process is terminated. However, it is not limited to this. For example, even if it is determined that a character is to be acquired, if information related to other characters is not stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405, an unstored character is displayed. It is good also as performing lottery of whether to acquire.

  Specifically, when the character A storage process (step S302-3-6-6-1-4) is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-6-1-5 to store the character B. When the process (step S302-3-6-6-1-8) ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-6-1-9, and the character C storage process (step S302-3-6). -6-1-12) is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-6-1-13, and the character D storage process (step S302-3-6-6-1-16) is performed. When the processing is completed, the processing may be shifted to step S302-3-6-6-1-17. Thereby, since there is a possibility that a plurality of characters can be acquired by a single character acquisition lottery process, the player can have a sense of expectation.

(Character merge processing)
Next, the character combination process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a diagram showing a subroutine for character combination processing.

(Step S302-3-6-6-3-1)
In step S302-3-6-6-3-1, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the character A is stocked. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not information relating to the character A is stored based on the value of the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the character A is stocked (step S302-3-6-6-3-1 = YES), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-6-3-2. If it is determined that the character A is not stocked (step S302-3-6-6-3-1 = NO), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-6-3-7.

(Step S302-3-6-6-3-2)
In step S302-3-6-6-3-2, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the character B is stocked. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not information related to the character B is stored based on the value of the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that character B is stocked (step S302-3-6-6-3-2 = YES), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-6-3-3. If it is determined that the character B is not stocked (step S302-3-6-6-3-2 = NO), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-6-3-7.

(Step S302-3-6-6-3-3)
In step S302-3-6-6-3-3, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the character F is stocked. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not information related to the character F is stored based on the value of the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the character F is stocked (step S302-3-6-6-3-3 = YES), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-6-3-7. If it is determined that the character F is not stocked (step S302-3-6-6-3-3 = NO), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-6-3-4.

(Step S302-3-6-6-3-4)
In step S302-3-6-6-3-4, the sub CPU 402 performs a character A erasing process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for erasing information related to the character A from the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-6-3-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-6-3-5.

(Step S302-3-6-6-3-5)
In step S302-3-6-6-3-5, the sub CPU 402 performs character B erasure processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of deleting information related to the character B from the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. Then, when step S302-3-6-6-3-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-6-3-6.

(Step S302-3-6-6-3-6)
In step S302-3-6-6-3-6, the sub CPU 402 performs character F storage processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for storing information related to the character F in a character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. When the process of step S302-3-6-6-3-6 ends, the character coalescence process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-6-4 of the bonus state process.

  If the character merge process is called from a character acquisition cell stop process described later (see FIG. 75), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-13 of the display determination command reception process.

(Step S302-3-6-6-3-7)
In step S302-3-6-6-3-7, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the character C is stocked. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not information related to the character C is stored based on the value of the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the character C is stocked (step S302-3-6-6-3-7 = YES), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-6-3-8. If it is determined that the character C is not stocked (step S302-3-6-6-3-7 = NO), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-6-3-13.

(Step S302-3-6-6-3-8)
In step S302-3-6-6-3-8, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the character D is stocked. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not information related to the character D is stored based on the value of the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the character D is stocked (step S302-3-6-6-3-8 = YES), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-6-3-9. If it is determined that the character D is not stocked (step S302-3-6-6-3-8 = NO), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-6-3-13.

(Step S302-3-6-6-3-9)
In step S302-3-6-6-3-9, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the character G is stocked. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not information related to the character G is stored based on the value of the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the character G is stocked (step S302-3-6-6-3-9 = YES), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-6-3-13. If it is determined that the character G is not stocked (step S302-3-6-6-3-9 = NO), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-6-3-10.

(Step S302-3-6-6-3-10)
In step S302-3-6-6-3-10, the sub CPU 402 performs a character C erasing process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of deleting information related to the character C from the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-6-3-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-6-3-11.

(Step S302-3-6-6-3-11)
In step S302-3-6-6-3-11, the sub CPU 402 performs character D erasure processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of deleting information related to the character D from the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-6-3-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-6-3-12.

(Step S302-3-6-6-3-12)
In step S302-3-6-6-3-12, the sub CPU 402 performs character G storage processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for storing information relating to the character G in a character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. When the process of step S302-3-6-6-3-12 ends, the character combination process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-6-4 of the bonus state process.

  If the character merge process is called from a character acquisition cell stop process described later (see FIG. 75), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-13 of the display determination command reception process.

(Step S302-3-6-6-3-13)
In step S302-3-6-6-3-13, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the character E is stocked. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not information related to the character E is stored based on the value of the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the character E is stocked (step S302-3-6-6-3-13 = YES), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-6-3-14. If it is determined that the character E is not stocked (step S302-3-6-6-3-13 = NO), the character combination processing subroutine is terminated, and the bonus state processing step S302-3- The process proceeds to 6-6-4.

  If the character merge process is called from a character acquisition cell stop process described later (see FIG. 75), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-13 of the display determination command reception process.

(Step S302-3-6-6-3-14)
In step S302-3-6-6-3-14, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the character F is stocked. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not information related to the character F is stored based on the value of the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the character F is stocked (step S302-3-6-6-3-14 = YES), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-6-3-15. If it is determined that the character E is not stocked (step S302-3-6-6-3-14 = NO), the character combination processing subroutine is terminated, and the bonus state processing step S302-3- The process proceeds to 6-6-4.

  If the character merge process is called from a character acquisition cell stop process described later (see FIG. 75), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-13 of the display determination command reception process.

(Step S302-3-6-6-3-15)
In step S302-3-6-6-3-15, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the character G is stocked. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not information related to the character G is stored based on the value of the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the character G is stocked (step S302-3-6-6-3-15 = YES), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-6-3-16. If it is determined that the character G is not stocked (step S302-3-6-6-3-15 = NO), the character coalescence process subroutine is terminated, and the Bonus state process step S302-3- The process proceeds to 6-6-4.

  If the character merge process is called from a character acquisition cell stop process described later (see FIG. 75), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-13 of the display determination command reception process.

(Step S302-3-6-6-3-16)
In step S302-3-6-6-3-16, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the character H is stocked. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not information related to the character H is stored based on the value of the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the character H is not stocked (step S302-3-6-6-3-16 = NO), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-6-3-17. . On the other hand, if it is determined that the character H is stocked (step S302-3-6-6-3-16 = YES), the character combination processing subroutine is terminated, and the bonus state processing step S302-3 is completed. The process proceeds to -6-6-4.

  If the character merge process is called from a character acquisition cell stop process described later (see FIG. 75), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-13 of the display determination command reception process.

(Step S302-3-6-6-3-17)
In step S302-3-6-6-3-17, the sub CPU 402 performs a character E erasing process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of deleting information related to the character E from the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-6-3-17 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-6-3-18.

(Step S302-3-6-6-3-18)
In step S302-3-6-6-3-18, the sub CPU 402 performs character F erasure processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of deleting information related to the character F from the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-6-3-18 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-6-3-19.

(Step S302-3-6-6-3-19)
In step S302-3-6-6-3-19, the sub CPU 402 performs a character G erasing process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of deleting information related to the character G from the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-6-3-19 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-6-3-20.

(Step S302-3-6-6-3-20)
In step S302-3-6-6-3-20, the sub CPU 402 performs character H storage processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for storing information related to the character H in a character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-6-3-20 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-6-3-21.

(Step S302-3-6-6-3-21)
In step S302-3-6-6-3-21, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “50” to the value of the character H games counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “50” as the value of the character H games counter in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. When the process of step S302-3-6-6-3-21 ends, the character coalescence process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-6-4 of the bonus state process.

  If the character merge process is called from a character acquisition cell stop process described later (see FIG. 75), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-13 of the display determination command reception process.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the sub CPU 402 is provided in the sub RAM 405 when information related to the character A and information related to the character B are stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. The information related to the character A and the information related to the character B stored in the stored character information storage area are deleted, and the information related to the character F is stored.

  Here, the character F is preferably a character that gives a privilege more advantageous to the player than the character A or the character B. In the present embodiment, when the information related to the character F is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405, the information related to the character A is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. Compared with the case where it is done, it becomes easy to create a chance mass. Further, when information related to the character F is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405, information related to the character B is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405. Compared to the case, it becomes easier to create a battle mass. This is because when the information related to the character F is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405, the information related to the character A or the information related to the character B is provided in the sub-RAM 405. This is an advantageous example as compared with the case where the information is stored in the information storage area.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 402 is provided in the sub RAM 405 when information related to the character C and information related to the character D are stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. The information related to the character C and the information related to the character D stored in the character information storage area are deleted, and the information related to the character G is stored.

  Here, the character G is preferably a character that gives a privilege more advantageous to the player than the character C or the character D. In the present embodiment, when information related to the character G is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405, information related to the character C is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405. Compared with the case where it is done, it becomes difficult to create the end cell. Further, when the information related to the character G is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405, the information related to the character D is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. Compared to the case, it is easier to create a character creation cell. Further, when the information related to the character G is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405, the information related to the character C and the information related to the character D are included in the character information stored in the sub-RAM 405. Compared with the case where it is stored in the storage area, it is easier to create an additional mass. This is because when information related to the character G is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405, information related to the character C and information related to the character D are provided in the sub RAM 405. This is an advantageous example as compared with the case where the information is stored in the information storage area.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 402 stores information related to the character E, information related to the character F, and information related to the character G in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. Processing for erasing information relating to character E, information relating to character F, information relating to character G, and information relating to character H stored in the character information storage area provided in sub-RAM 405 I do.

  Here, the character H is desirably a character that gives a privilege more advantageous to the player than the character E, the character F, or the character G. In the present embodiment, when information relating to the character H is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405, information relating to the character E is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405. Compared with the case where it is made, it becomes easier to create a chance state transition cell and a definite cell, and it is difficult to create an end cell. Further, when the expected value when the battle mass stops and the expected value when the chance mass stop are high and the winning areas “27” to “34” are determined by the internal lottery process in the added state B, The value added to the value of the AT state set number counter provided in the RAM 405 is increased. Further, when information related to the character H is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405, information related to the character F is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405. Compared to the case, the chance state transition cell and the final cell are easily created, and the end cell is difficult to create. Further, when the expected value when the battle mass stops and the expected value when the chance mass stop are high and the winning areas “27” to “34” are determined by the internal lottery process in the added state B, The value added to the value of the AT state set number counter provided in the RAM 405 is increased.

  Further, when information related to the character H is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405, information related to the character G is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405. Compared to the case, the chance state transition cell and the final cell are easily created, and the end cell is difficult to create. Further, when the expected value when the battle mass stops and the expected value when the chance mass stop are high and the winning areas “27” to “34” are determined by the internal lottery process in the added state B, The value added to the value of the AT state set number counter provided in the RAM 405 is increased. When the information related to the character H is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405, the information related to the character E, the information related to the character F, and the information related to the character G are This is an advantageous example as compared with the case where it is stored in the character information storage area provided in the RAM 405.

(Process for AT state)
Next, the AT state process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a subroutine for AT state processing.

(Step S302-3-6-8-1)
In step S302-3-6-8-1, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the AT state game number counter is “1” or more. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the AT state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405 is equal to or greater than “1”. If it is determined that the value of the AT state game number counter is “1” or more (step S302-3-6-8-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-8-2. When the process is shifted and it is determined that the value of the AT state game number counter is not equal to or greater than “1” (step S302-3-6-8-1 = No), step S302-3-6-8 is performed. The process is shifted to -3.

(Step S302-3-6-8-2)
In step S302-3-6-8-2, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the AT state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the AT state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-8-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-8-3.

(Step S302-3-6-8-3)
In step S302-3-6-8-3, the sub CPU 402 performs an AT state game number counter addition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs the AT state provided in the sub RAM 405 based on the AT state game number counter addition lottery table (AT state) provided in the sub ROM 404 (see FIG. 43A). A process of drawing whether or not to add the value of the game number counter is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-8-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-8-4.

(Step S302-3-6-8-4)
In step S302-3-6-8-4, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs the lottery process for adding the AT state game number counter in step S302-3-6-8-3, and as a result, determines the value of the AT state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405. A process for determining whether or not to add is determined. And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-6-8-4 = Yes), it transfers to a process to step S302-3-6-8-5, and it determined with having not been won. In this case (step S302-3-6-8-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-8-6.

(Step S302-3-6-8-5)
In step S302-3-6-8-5, the sub CPU 402 performs an AT state game number counter addition process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 uses the value determined by the AT state game number counter addition lottery process in step S302-3-6-8-3 as the AT state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405. Performs processing to add to the value. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-8-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-8-6.

(Step S302-3-6-8-6)
In step S302-3-6-8-6, the sub CPU 402 performs effect determination processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 stores the start lever operation effect determination table (for the AT state) (see FIG. 28D) provided in the sub ROM 404 and the game information storage process in step S302-2. Based on the information related to the selected winning area, a process for determining the production contents is performed. When the process of step S302-3-6-8-6 ends, the subroutine for the AT state process ends, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

  Here, the sub CPU 402 (a) in the effect determination process in step S302-3-6-8-6, the start lever operation effect determination table (for AT state) (see FIG. 28D), step In addition to determining the production contents based on the information related to the winning area stored by the game information storage process of S302-2, (b) the value of the progress mass counter provided in the sub RAM 405, the sub Based on the value stored in the map information storage area provided in the RAM 405 and the value of the continuous effect counter provided in the sub-RAM 405, processing for determining the content of the effect is performed.

  For example, when “definite cell” is stored in the value of the map information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405, the sub CPU 402 produces an effect that makes the player expect to shift to the added state A. Perform the decision process. Thereby, the sub CPU 402 has a winning area where the information related to the winning area stored by the game information storing process of step S302-2 is advantageous for the player, or a winning area with a relatively low probability of being determined as the winning area. Even if it is not decided, it is possible to perform an effect that the player has a sense of expectation.

  Although specifically described in detail later, in the present embodiment, the sub CPU 402 is provided in the sub RAM 405 based on the fact that the symbol combination related to “normal replay” is displayed on the active line. When a combination of symbols related to “roulette replay” is displayed on the active line, based on the value of the progress mass counter provided in the sub-RAM 405 The process of updating the current location is performed.

  For this reason, in the first map information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405, information related to the “determined square” is stored, and the value of the progress mass counter provided in the sub RAM 405 is “1”. Is stored, the symbol combination related to “roulette replay” is displayed on the active line, and the “stop box” is stopped. Therefore, in this case, the sub CPU 402 can execute an effect that allows the player to have a sense of expectation.

  Further, in the above case, even when the combination of symbols related to “normal replay” is displayed and the value of the progress mass counter provided in the sub RAM 405 becomes “2”, “roulette replay” is displayed. If the value of the progress counter provided in the sub-RAM 405 is updated to “1” by displaying the symbol combination related to “normal replay” before the symbol combination is displayed, Since it is stopped at the “fixed cell”, the symbol combination related to “roulette replay” is displayed, and the expectation can be maintained until it cannot be stopped at the “fixed cell”.

Further, in the above case, the symbol combination related to “normal replay” is displayed, the value of the progress mass counter provided in the sub RAM 405 is “2”, and the symbol combination related to “roulette replay” is displayed. Even if it is a case, since a map is newly created by the map creation process described later, the combination of symbols related to “roulette replay” is displayed, and it is not possible to stop at the “fixed square”. Even after that, you can have a sense of expectation.

(Additional state A processing)
Next, the processing for the added state A will be described based on FIG. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a subroutine for processing for the added state A.

(Step S302-3-6-10-1)
In step S302-3-6-10-1, the sub CPU 402 performs an AT state game number counter addition lottery process. More specifically, the sub CPU 402 is based on the AT state game number counter addition lottery table (addition state A) provided in the sub ROM 404 (see FIG. 43B), and the AT provided in the sub RAM 405. A process of drawing whether or not to add the value of the state game number counter is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-10-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-10-2.

(Step S302-3-6-10-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-6-10-2, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs the lottery process for adding the AT state game number counter in step S302-3-6-10-1, and as a result, determines the value of the AT state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405. A process for determining whether or not to add is determined. And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-6-10-2 = Yes), it transfers to a process to step S302-3-6-10-3, and it determined with having not been won. In this case (step S302-3-6-10-2 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-10-4.

(Step S302-3-6-10-3)
In step S302-3-6-10-3, the sub CPU 402 performs an AT state game number counter addition process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 uses the value determined by the AT state game number counter addition lottery process in step S302-3-6-10-2 as the AT state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405. Performs processing to add to the value. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-10-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-10-4.

(Step S302-3-6-10-4)
In step S302-3-6-10-4, the sub CPU 402 performs an effect determination process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs the start lever operation stage effect determination table (for the added state A) (see FIG. 28E) provided in the sub ROM 404 and the game information storage process in step S302-2. Based on the stored information relating to the winning area, a process for determining the production contents is performed. When the process of step S302-3-6-10-4 is completed, the subroutine for the added state A process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process on the sub control board.

  Here, the sub CPU 402 (a) in the effect determination process in step S302-3-6-10-4, the start lever operation effect determination table (for the added state A) (see FIG. 28E), In addition to determining the production content based on the information related to the winning area stored by the game information storage process of step S302-2, (b) the value of the progress mass counter provided in the sub RAM 405, Based on the value stored in the map information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405 and the value of the continuous effect counter provided in the sub-RAM 405, processing for determining the content of the effect is performed.

  For example, when “determined square” is stored in the value of the map information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405, the sub CPU 402 produces an effect that makes the player expect to shift to the added state B. Perform the decision process. Thereby, the sub CPU 402 has a winning area where the information related to the winning area stored by the game information storing process of step S302-2 is advantageous for the player, or a winning area with a relatively low probability of being determined as the winning area. Even if it is not decided, it is possible to perform an effect that the player has a sense of expectation.

  Although specifically described in detail later, in the present embodiment, the sub CPU 402 is provided in the sub RAM 405 based on the fact that the symbol combination related to “normal replay” is displayed on the active line. When a combination of symbols related to “roulette replay” is displayed on the active line, based on the value of the progress mass counter provided in the sub-RAM 405 The process of updating the current location is performed.

  For this reason, in the first map information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405, information related to the “determined square” is stored, and the value of the progress mass counter provided in the sub RAM 405 is “1”. Is stored, the symbol combination related to “roulette replay” is displayed on the active line, and the “stop box” is stopped. Therefore, in this case, the sub CPU 402 can execute an effect that allows the player to have a sense of expectation.

  Further, in the above case, even when the combination of symbols related to “normal replay” is displayed and the value of the progress mass counter provided in the sub RAM 405 becomes “2”, “roulette replay” is displayed. If the value of the progress counter provided in the sub-RAM 405 is updated to “1” by displaying the symbol combination related to “normal replay” before the symbol combination is displayed, Since it is stopped at the “fixed cell”, the symbol combination related to “roulette replay” is displayed, and the expectation can be maintained until it cannot be stopped at the “fixed cell”.

(Additional state B processing)
Next, the process for the added state B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a subroutine for the extra state B process.

(Step S302-3-6-12-1)
In step S302-3-6-12-1, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the added state B game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the added state B game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-12-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-12-2.

(Step S302-3-6-12-2)
In step S302-3-6-12-2, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether the winning area is any one of “27” to “34”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 determines whether the winning area is any one of “27” to “34” based on the information related to the winning area stored by the game information storing process of step S302-2. The process which determines is performed. If it is determined that the winning area is any one of “27” to “34” (step S302-3-6-12-2 = Yes), step S302-3-6-12- 3, and when it is determined that the winning area is not any of “27” to “34” (step S302-3-6-12-2 = No), step S302-3 The process proceeds to -6-12-4.

(Step S302-3-6-12-3)
In step S302-3-6-12-3, the sub CPU 402 performs an AT state set number counter addition process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of adding the value of the AT state set number counter provided in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-12-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-12-4.

  Here, in this embodiment, the sub CPU 402 relates to the character C in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 in the AT state set number counter addition process in step S302-3-6-12-3. If information is stored, a process of adding “2” to the value of the AT state set number counter provided in the sub-RAM 405 is performed. Further, the sub CPU 402 stores information related to the character H in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 in the AT state set number counter addition processing in step S302-3-6-12-3. In this case, a process of adding “3” to the value of the AT state set number counter provided in the sub RAM 405 is performed. On the other hand, in the AT state set number counter addition process in step S302-3-6-12-3, information on the character C and information on the character H are stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If not, “1” is added to the value of the AT state set number counter provided in the sub-RAM 405.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 402 determines the value of the AT state set number counter provided in the sub RAM 405 based on the information related to the character stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, based on the information related to the character stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405, a value for adding the value of the AT state set number counter provided in the sub RAM 405 is determined. A lottery may be performed, and a process of adding the value of the AT state set number counter provided in the sub RAM 405 may be performed according to the result of the lottery.

(Step S302-3-6-12-4)
In step S302-3-6-12-4, the sub CPU 402 performs an AT state game number counter addition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 is based on the AT state game number counter addition lottery table (addition state B) provided in the sub ROM 404 (see FIG. 43C), and the AT provided in the sub RAM 405. A process of drawing whether or not to add the value of the state game number counter is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-12-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-12-5.

(Step S302-3-6-12-5)
In step S302-3-6-12-5, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs the lottery process for adding the AT state game number counter in step S302-3-6-12-4, and as a result, determines the value of the AT state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405. A process for determining whether or not to add is determined. And when it determines with having been won (step S302-3-6-12-5 = Yes), it transfers to a process to step S302-3-6-12-6, and it determined with not having been won. In this case (step S302-3-6-12-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-12-7.

(Step S302-3-6-12-6)
In step S302-3-6-12-6, the sub CPU 402 performs an AT state game number counter addition process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 uses the value determined by the AT state game number counter addition lottery process in step S302-3-6-12-4 as the AT state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405. Performs processing to add to the value. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-12-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-12-7.

(Step S302-3-6-12-7)
In step S302-3-6-12-7, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the added state B game number counter is “0”. Specifically, as a result of subtracting “1” from the value of the added state B game number counter by the process of step S302-3-6-12-1, the sub CPU 402 obtains the value of the added state B game number counter. A process of determining whether or not “0” has been reached is performed. If it is determined that the value of the added state B game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-6-12-7 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-12-8. When the process is shifted and it is determined that the value of the added state B game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-6-12-7 = No), step S302-3-6-12 is executed. The process is shifted to -9.

(Step S302-3-6-12-8)
In step S302-3-6-12-8, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “05” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of updating the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 to “05”. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-12-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-12-9.

(Step S302-3-6-12-9)
In step S302-3-6-12-9, the sub CPU 402 performs effect determination processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs the start lever operation stage effect determination table (for the added state B) (see FIG. 28 (f)) provided in the sub ROM 404 and the game information storage process in step S302-2. Based on the stored information relating to the winning area, a process for determining the production contents is performed. When the process of step S302-3-6-12-9 ends, the subroutine for the added state B ends, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

  In the added state B, the sub CPU 402 is different from the normal state, the chance state, the AT state, and the added state A, and the value of the progress mass counter provided in the sub RAM 405 or the map provided in the sub RAM 405. The production contents are not determined based on the value stored in the information storage area. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the added state B as well as the normal state, the chance state, the AT state, and the added state A, the value of the progress mass counter provided in the sub RAM 405 and the sub RAM 405 It is good also as determining the production content based on the value stored in the map information storage area provided in.

(Bonus ready state processing)
Next, the Bonus preparation state process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the Bonus preparation state process.

(Step S302-3-6-13-1)
In step S302-3-6-13-1, the sub CPU 402 performs a bonus state game number counter addition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 sets the value of the bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405 based on the bonus state game number counter addition lottery table provided in the sub ROM 404 (see FIG. 42). A process of drawing whether or not to add is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-13-1 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-13-1.

(Step S302-3-6-13-1)
In step S302-3-6-13-2, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs the lottery process for adding the bonus state game number counter in step S302-3-6-13-1, and as a result, determines the value of the bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405. A process for determining whether or not to add is determined. And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-6-13-1-2 = Yes), it transfers to a process to step S302-3-6-13-3, and it determined with having not been won. In this case (step S302-3-6-13-2 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-13-4.

(Step S302-3-6-13-3)
In step S302-3-6-13-3, the sub CPU 402 performs a bonus state game number counter addition process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 uses the value determined by the bonus state game number counter addition lottery process in step S302-3-6-13-1 as the Bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405. Performs processing to add to the value. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-13-3 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-13-3.

(Step S302-3-6-13-4)
In step S302-3-6-13-4, the sub CPU 402 performs effect determination processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs the start lever operation stage effect determination table (for the Bonus preparation state) (see FIG. 28G) provided in the sub ROM 404 and the game information storage process in step S302-2. Based on the stored information relating to the winning area, a process for determining the production contents is performed. When the process of step S302-3-6-13-4 ends, the subroutine for the bonus preparation state process ends, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

  In the Bonus preparation state, the sub CPU 402 is different from the normal state, the chance state, the AT state, and the added state A, and the value of the progress mass counter provided in the sub RAM 405 and the map provided in the sub RAM 405. The production contents are not determined based on the value stored in the information storage area. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even in the Bonus preparation state, the value of the progress mass counter provided in the sub RAM 405 and the sub RAM 405 are the same as in the normal state, the chance state, the AT state, and the added state A. It is good also as determining the production content based on the value stored in the map information storage area provided in.

(Process when receiving display judgment command)
Next, the display determination command reception process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a subroutine of display determination command reception processing.

(Step S302-3-12-1)
In step S302-3-12-1, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the continuous effect counter is “1” or more. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the continuous effect counter provided in the sub RAM 405 is “1” or more. And when it determines with the value of a continuous production counter being "1" or more (step S302-3-12-1 = YES), a process is transferred to step S302-3-12-3, and a continuous production is carried out. If it is determined that the counter value is not equal to or greater than “1” (step S302-3-12-1 = NO), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-2.

(Step S302-3-12-2)
In step S302-3-12-2, the sub CPU 402 performs state transition processing which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the continuous effect counter provided in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-12-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-13.

(Step S302-3-12-3)
In step S302-3-12-3, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not a roulette replay has been displayed. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 determines whether or not the symbol combination related to “roulette replay” is displayed on the active line based on the information related to the display determination command stored by the game information storage processing in step S302-2. The process which determines is performed. If it is determined that the roulette replay is displayed (step S302-3-12-3 = YES), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4, and it is determined that the roulette replay is not displayed. If so (step S302-3-12-3 = NO), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-5.

(Step S302-3-12-4)
In step S302-3-12-4, the sub CPU 402 performs a roulette replay display process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this processing, the sub CPU 402 performs map information creation processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. Then, when the process of step S302-3-12-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-13.

(Step S302-3-12-5)
In step S302-3-12-5, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not normal replay is displayed. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 determines whether or not the symbol combination related to “normal replay” is displayed on the active line based on the information related to the display determination command stored in the game information storage process in step S302-2. The process which determines is performed. If it is determined that the normal replay is displayed (step S302-3-12-5 = YES), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-6, and it is determined that the normal replay is not displayed. If so (step S302-3-12-5 = NO), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-7.

(Step S302-3-12-6)
In step S302-3-12-6, the sub CPU 402 performs normal replay display processing which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of updating the value of the progress mass counter provided in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-12-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-13.

(Step S302-3-12-7)
In step S302-3-12-7, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not a blue 7 middle stage replay is displayed. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 displays the combination of symbols related to “blue 7 middle stage replay” on the active line based on the information related to the display determination command stored by the game information storage processing in step S302-2. The process which determines whether it was carried out is performed. If it is determined that the blue 7 middle level replay is displayed (step S302-3-12-7 = YES), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-8, and the blue 7 middle level replay is performed. If it is determined that it is not displayed (step S302-3-12-7 = NO), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-9.

(Step S302-3-12-8)
In step S302-3-12-8, the sub CPU 402 performs a blue 7 middle stage replay display process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of adding the value of the AT state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405 and the like. Then, when the process of step S302-3-12-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-13.

(Step S302-3-12-9)
In step S302-3-12-9, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the red 7 replay is displayed. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 displays whether the symbol combination related to “Red 7 Replay” is displayed on the active line based on the information related to the display determination command stored by the game information storage process of step S302-2. Processing to determine whether or not. If it is determined that the red 7 replay is displayed (step S302-3-12-9 = YES), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-10, and the red 7 replay is not displayed. Is determined (step S302-3-12-9 = NO), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-11.

(Step S302-3-12-10)
In step S302-3-12-10, the sub CPU 402 performs a red 7 replay display process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of adding the value of the AT state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405 and the like. Then, when the process of step S302-3-12-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-13.

(Step S302-3-12-11)
In step S302-3-12-11, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the bell has won. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 determines whether or not the symbol combination related to “BELL” is displayed on the active line based on the information related to the display determination command stored by the game information storage process in step S302-2. The process which determines is performed. If it is determined that the bell has won (step S302-3-12-11 = YES), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-12, and it is determined that the bell has not won. In this case (step S302-3-12-11 = NO), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-13.

(Step S302-3-12-12)
In step S302-3-12-12, the sub CPU 402 performs a bell winning process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of adding the value of the bell continuous winning counter provided in the sub RAM 405 and the like. Then, when the process of step S302-3-12-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-13.

(Step S302-3-12-13)
In step S302-3-12-13, the sub CPU 402 performs a character storage erasure determination process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 402 determines whether or not the character erasure condition defined for each character is satisfied. When it is determined that the character erasure condition is satisfied, the character information provided in the sub RAM 405 is determined. A process of deleting from the storage area is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-12-13 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-14.

(Step S302-3-12-14)
In step S302-3-12-14, the sub CPU 402 performs an effect determination process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 uses the all-reel stop effect determination table (see FIG. 29) provided in the sub ROM 404 and the values stored in the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. Based on this, processing for determining the production contents is performed. When the process of step S302-3-12-14 ends, the display determination command reception process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

  Here, the sub CPU 402 (a) in the effect determination process in step S302-3-12-14, an all reel stop effect determination table (see FIG. 29) and a state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. In addition to determining the contents of the effect based on the value stored in (b), (b) the value of the progress mass counter provided in the sub RAM 405 and the map information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 Based on the stored value and the information related to the display determination command stored in the game information storage process in step S302-2, a process for determining the content of the effect is performed.

  For example, when “determined square” is stored in the value of the first map information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405, the value of the progress mass counter provided in the sub RAM 405 is “1”. When the information related to the display determination command stored by the game information storage processing of S302-2 has information that the combination of symbols related to “roulette replay” is displayed on the active line, the sub CPU 402 determines that “confirmation” The content of the effect to notify that the state managed by the sub-control board 400 has been transferred is determined.

  Note that the sub CPU 402 performs control to determine the content of the effect based on the value stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. For example, when the information related to the character B is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405, the sub CPU 402 stores the character information provided in the sub RAM 405 when the sub CPU 402 stops at the battle square. Compared to the case where the information related to the character B is not stored in the area, a process for determining the content of the effect that makes the player have a sense of expectation is performed.

(State transition process)
Next, the state transition process will be described based on FIG. FIG. 70 is a diagram showing a subroutine of state transition processing.

(Step S302-3-12-2-1)
In step S302-3-12-2-1, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the continuous effect counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the continuous effect counter provided in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-12-2-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-2-2.

(Step S302-3-12-2-2)
In step S302-3-12-2-2, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the continuous effect counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 subtracts “1” from the value of the continuous effect counter provided in the sub RAM 405 by the process of step S302-3-12-2-2, so that the value of the continuous effect counter becomes “ A process of determining whether or not “0” has been reached is performed. If it is determined that the value of the continuous effect counter is “0” (step S302-3-12-2-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-2-3. If it is determined that the value of the continuous effect counter is not “0” (step S302-3-12-2-2 = No), the state transition processing subroutine is terminated and the display determination command reception processing is completed. The process proceeds to step S302-3-12-13.

(Step S302-3-12-2-3)
In step S302-3-12-2-3, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a victory time. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 determines whether or not the victory effect has been determined by the battle lottery process in the battle mass stop process (see FIG. 74) in step S302-3-12-4-5 described later. I do. If it is determined that it is a victory time (step S302-3-12-2-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-2-4, and it is determined that it is not a victory time. If so (step S302-3-12-2-3 = No), the state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-13 of the display determination command reception process.

(Step S302-3-12-2-4)
In step S302-3-12-2-4, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the state number is “01”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not the state number “01” is stored in the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the state number is “01” (step S302-3-12-2-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-2-5, and the state number Is determined not to be “01” (step S302-3-12-2-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-2-6.

(Step S302-3-12-2-5)
In step S302-3-12-2-5, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “07” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to update the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 to “07”. When the process of step S302-3-12-2-5 is completed, the state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-13 of the display determination command reception process.

(Step S302-3-12-2-6)
In step S302-3-12-2-6, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not the state number is “02”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not the state number “02” is stored in the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. When it is determined that the state number is “02” (step S302-3-12-2-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-2-7, and the state number Is determined not to be “02” (step S302-3-12-2-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-2-8.

(Step S302-3-12-2-7)
In step S302-3-12-2-7, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “07” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to update the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 to “07”. When the process of step S302-3-12-2-7 is completed, the subroutine of the state transition process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-13 of the display determination command reception process.

(Step S302-3-12-2-8)
In step S302-3-12-2-4, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the state number is “04”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the state number “04” is stored in the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the state number is “04” (step S302-3-12-2-8 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-2-9, and the state number Is determined not to be “04” (step S302-3-12-2-8 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-2-10.

(Step S302-3-12-2-9)
In step S302-3-12-2-9, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “05” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of updating the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 to “05”. When the process of step S302-3-12-2-9 is completed, the state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-13 of the display determination command reception process.

(Step S302-3-12-2-10)
In step S302-3-12-2-10, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the state number is “05”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the state number “05” is stored in the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. When it is determined that the state number is “05” (step S302-3-12-2-10 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-2-11, and the state number Is determined not to be “05” (step S302-3-12-2-10 = No), the state transition processing subroutine is terminated and step S302-3-12 of the display determination command reception processing is completed. The processing is shifted to 13.

(Step S302-3-12-2-11)
In step S302-3-12-2-11, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “06” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to update the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 to “06”. Then, when the process of step S302-3-12-2-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-2-12.

(Step S302-3-12-2-12)
In step S302-3-12-2-12, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “20” in the added state B game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “20” in the added state B game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405. When the processing of step S302-3-12-2-12 ends, the state transition processing subroutine ends, and the processing shifts to step S302-3-12-13 of the display determination command reception processing.

(Process during roulette replay display)
Next, roulette replay display processing will be described based on FIG. FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a subroutine of roulette replay display processing.

(Step S302-3-12-4-1)
In step S302-3-12-4-1, the sub CPU 402 performs map information creation processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this processing, the sub CPU 402 sets a map creation table (see FIGS. 34 to 37) provided in the sub ROM 404 based on the value stored in the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. Perform processing. Then, when the process of step S302-3-12-4-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-2.

(Step S302-3-12-4-2)
In step S302-3-12-4-2, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the continuous effect counter is “1” or more. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the continuous effect counter provided in the sub RAM 405 is “1” or more. If it is determined that the value of the continuous effect counter is “1” or more (step S302-3-12-4-2 = Yes), the subroutine of the roulette replay display process is terminated, and the display determination command The process proceeds to step S302-3-12-13 of the reception process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the continuous effect counter is not “1” or more (step S302-3-12-4-2 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-3. To do.

(Step S302-3-12-4-3)
In step S302-3-12-4-3, the sub CPU 402 performs current location update processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 updates the current location information based on the value of the progress mass counter provided in the sub RAM 405 and the value stored in the map information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. I do. Then, when the process of step S302-3-12-4-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-4.

(Step S302-3-12-4-4)
In step S302-3-12-4-4, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not the current location is a battle square. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the current location is a battle square as a result of the current location being updated by the current location update processing in step S302-3-12-4-3. If it is determined that the current location is a battle square (step S302-3-12-4-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-5, and the current location is a battle square. If it is determined that this is not the case (step S302-3-12-4-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-6.

(Step S302-3-12-4-5)
In step S302-3-12-4-5, the sub CPU 402 performs a battle mass stop process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 402 performs a lottery or the like for determining whether to ultimately win or lose in the battle effect. When the process of step S302-3-12-4-5 is completed, the subroutine of the roulette replay display process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-13 of the display determination command reception process.

(Step S302-3-12-4-6)
In step S302-3-12-4-6, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the current location is a character acquisition cell. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the current location is a character acquisition cell as a result of the current location being updated by the current location update processing in step S302-3-12-4-3. If it is determined that the current location is a character acquisition cell (step S302-3-12-4-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-7, where the current location is the character. If it is determined that it is not an acquired mass (step S302-3-12-4-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-8.

(Step S302-3-12-4-7)
In step S302-3-12-4-7, the sub CPU 402 performs a character acquisition square stop process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 402 performs a lottery to determine whether or not to acquire a character, and performs a process of updating the value of the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 based on the lottery result. When the process of step S302-3-12-4-7 ends, the subroutine of the roulette replay display process ends, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-13 of the display determination command reception process.

(Step S302-3-12-4-8)
In step S302-3-12-4-8, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the current location is a chance cell. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the current location is a chance cell as a result of the current location being updated by the current location update processing in step S302-3-12-4-3. If it is determined that the current location is a chance cell (step S302-3-12-4-8 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-9, and the current location is a chance cell. If it is determined that it is not (step S302-3-12-4-8 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-10.

(Step S302-3-12-4-9)
In step S302-3-12-4-9, the sub CPU 402 performs a chance mass stop time process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the process, the sub CPU 402 performs a lottery to determine whether or not to update the state number, and performs a process of updating the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 based on the lottery result. When the process of step S302-3-12-4-9 ends, the subroutine for roulette replay display processing ends, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-13 for display determination command reception processing.

(Step S302-3-12-4-10)
In step S302-3-12-4-10, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the current location is a confirmed cell. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not the current location is a fixed cell as a result of the current location being updated by the current location update processing in step S302-3-12-4-3. If it is determined that the current location is a confirmed cell (step S302-3-12-4-10 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-11, and the current location is a confirmed cell. If it is determined that this is not the case (step S302-3-12-4-10 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-12.

(Step S302-3-12-4-11)
In step S302-3-12-4-11, the sub CPU 402 performs a definite cell stop process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of updating the state number based on the value stored in the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. When the process of step S302-3-12-4-11 ends, the subroutine for roulette replay display processing ends, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-13 for display determination command reception processing.

(Step S302-3-12-4-12)
In step S <b> 302-3-12-4-12, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the current location is an additional square. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not the current location is an additional square as a result of the current location being updated by the current location update processing in step S302-3-12-4-3. If it is determined that the current location is an additional cell (step S302-3-12-4-12 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-13, and the current location is an additional cell. If it is determined that it is not (step S302-3-12-4-12 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-14.

(Step S302-3-12-4-13)
In step S302-3-12-4-13, the sub CPU 402 performs an additional mass stop time process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of adding the value of the AT state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405 and the like. When the process of step S302-3-12-4-13 ends, the subroutine of the roulette replay display process ends, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-13 of the display determination command reception process.

(Step S302-3-12-4-14)
In step S302-3-12-4-14, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the current location is a stage transition square. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not the current location is a stage transition cell as a result of the current location being updated by the current location update processing in step S302-3-12-4-3. If it is determined that the current location is a stage transition cell (step S302-3-12-4-14 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-15, where the current location is the stage. If it is determined that it is not a transition cell (step S302-3-12-4-14 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-16.

(Step S302-3-12-4-15)
In step S302-3-12-4-15, the sub CPU 402 performs a stage transition mass stop process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the process, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of lottery for determining whether or not to shift from the normal state to the chance state. When the process of step S302-3-12-4-15 ends, the subroutine for roulette replay display processing ends, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-13 for display determination command reception processing.

(Step S302-3-12-4-16)
In step S302-3-12-4-16, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not the current location is an end cell. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not the current location is the end cell as a result of the current location being updated by the current location update processing in step S302-3-12-4-3. If it is determined that the current location is the end cell (step S302-3-12-4-16 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-17, and the current location is the end cell. If it is determined that it is not (step S302-3-12-4-16 = No), the subroutine for roulette replay display processing is terminated, and step S302-3-12-13 for display determination command reception processing is terminated. The process is transferred to.

(Step S302-3-12-24-17)
In step S302-3-12-4-17, the sub CPU 402 performs an end cell stop process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this processing, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for updating the value in the state number storage area based on the value stored in the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. When the process of step S302-3-12-4-17 ends, the subroutine of the roulette replay display process ends, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-13 of the display determination command reception process.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the value of the continuous effect counter provided in the sub RAM 405 is “1” or more, the combination of symbols related to the roulette replay is displayed. However, the current location information is not updated. For this reason, when the value of the continuous effect counter provided in the sub RAM 405 is “1” or more, (a) whether the game shifts to a state that is advantageous for a player who is performed when the battle mass or chance mass is stopped. No lottery will be held. Also, (b) the lottery for determining whether or not to acquire the character to be given to the player when the character acquisition mass is stopped is not performed. Further, (c) the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 is not updated when the fixed cell is stopped. Further, (d) the AT state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405, which is performed when the additional cell is stopped, is not added. In addition, (e) the lottery of whether or not to shift to the chance state that is performed when the stage transition mass is stopped is not performed. These are specific examples that are disadvantageous for the player during the continuous performance.

  It should be noted that the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 is not updated when the end cell is stopped. These are specific examples that are advantageous to the player during the continuous performance.

(Map information creation process)
Next, the map information creation process will be described based on FIG. FIG. 72 is a diagram showing a subroutine of map information creation processing.

(Step S302-3-12-4-1-1)
In step S302-3-12-4-1-1, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not the value of the continuous effect counter is “1” or more. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the continuous effect counter provided in the sub RAM 405 is “1” or more. If it is determined that the value of the continuous effect counter is “1” or more (step S302-3-12-4-1-1 = Yes), the map information creation subroutine is terminated and the roulette replay is performed. The processing shifts to step S302-3-12-4-2 of the display time processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the continuous effect counter is not “1” or more (step S302-3-12-4-1-1 = No), step S302-3-12-4-1-2 is performed. The process is transferred to.

(Step S302-3-12-4-1-2)
In step S302-3-12-4-1-2, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not the state number is “01”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not the state number “01” is stored in the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the state number is “01” (step S302-3-12-4-1-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-1-3. If it is determined that the state number is not “01” (step S302-3-12-4-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-1-4. .

(Step S302-3-12-4-1-3)
In step S302-3-12-4-1-3, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for setting a normal state map creation table. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for setting a normal state map creation table (see FIG. 34) provided in the sub ROM 404. Then, when the process of step S302-3-12-4-1-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-1-10.

(Step S302-3-12-4-1-4)
In step S302-3-12-4-1-4, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not the state number is “02”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not the state number “02” is stored in the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the state number is “02” (step S302-3-12-4-1-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-1-5. If it is determined that the state number is not “02” (step S302-3-12-4-1-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-1-6. .

(Step S302-3-12-4-1-5)
In step S302-3-12-4-1-5, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for setting a chance state map creation table. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for setting a chance state map creation table (see FIG. 35) provided in the sub ROM 404. Then, when the process of step S302-3-12-2-4-1-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-2-4-1-10.

(Step S302-3-12-4-1-6)
In step S <b> 302-3-12-4-1-6, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the state number is “04”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the state number “04” is stored in the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the state number is “04” (step S302-3-12-4-1-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-1-7. If it is determined that the state number is not “04” (step S302-3-12-4-1-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-1-8. .

(Step S302-3-12-4-1-7)
In step S302-3-12-4-1-7, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for setting an AT state map creation table. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for setting an AT state map creation table (see FIG. 36) provided in the sub ROM 404. Then, when the process of step S302-3-12-2-4-1-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-2-4-1-10.

(Step S302-3-12-4-1-8)
In step S302-3-12-4-1-8, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the state number is “05”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the state number “05” is stored in the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the state number is “05” (step S302-3-12-4-1-8 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-1-9. However, if it is determined that the state number is not “05” (step S302-3-12-4-1-8 = No), the subroutine for map information creation processing is terminated, and the roulette replay display time processing step is completed. The process proceeds to S302-3-12-4-2.

(Step S302-3-12-4-1-9)
In step S302-3-12-4-1-9, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting an additional state A map creation table. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting an added state A map creation table (see FIG. 37) provided in the sub ROM 404. Then, when the process of step S302-3-12-2-4-1-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-2-4-1-10.

(Step S302-3-12-2-4-1-10)
In step S302-3-12-2-4-1-10, the sub CPU 402 performs map creation processing which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining and storing a new map by lottery until the value of the map creation counter becomes “0”. When the process of step S302-3-12-2-4-1-10 ends, the map information creation process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-2 of the roulette replay display process. To do.

(Map creation process)
Next, the map creation process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a subroutine for map creation processing.

(Step S302-3-12-4-4-1-10-1)
In step S302-3-12-4-1-10-1, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for setting a map creation counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of copying the value of the progress mass counter provided in the sub RAM 405 to the value of the map creation counter provided in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-12-2-4-1-10-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-1-10-2.

(Step S302-3-12-1-4-1-10-2)
In step S302-3-12-4-1-10-2, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the map creation counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the map creation counter provided in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-12-4-1-10-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-1-10-3.

(Step S302-3-12-4-1-10-3)
In step S302-3-12-4-1-10-3, the sub CPU 402 performs random value acquisition processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for obtaining a random value necessary for creating a map. Then, when the process of step S302-3-12-4-1-10-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-1-10-10.

(Step S302-3-12-1-4-1-10-4)
In step S302-3-12-2-4-1-10-4, the sub CPU 402 performs map lottery processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 executes the map creation table (see FIGS. 34 to 37) set by the map information creation process (see FIG. 72) and the steps S302-3-12-4-1-10-3. Based on the random value acquired by the random value acquisition process, a process of drawing a newly created map is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-12-4-1-10-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-1-10-5.

  Here, a specific example of the map lottery process will be described. In the normal state, first, the sub CPU 402 performs a lottery to determine whether or not to create a fixed cell according to (a) a fixed cell lottery table (see FIG. 34A), and generates a fixed cell as a result of the lottery. If determined, the map lottery process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined not to create a fixed cell, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to create a battle cell according to (b) the battle cell lottery table (see FIG. 34B), and the result of the lottery If it is determined to create a battle mass, the map lottery process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined not to create a battle cell, (c) a chance cell lottery table (see FIG. 34 (c)) is used to determine whether to create a chance cell, and the result of the lottery If it is determined to create a chance mass, the map lottery process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined not to create a chance cell, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not a character acquisition cell is to be created based on the (d) character acquisition cell lottery table (see FIG. 34D). As a result, if it is determined to create a character acquisition cell, the map lottery process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is decided not to create a character acquisition cell, (e) a stage transfer cell lottery table (see FIG. 34 (e)) is used to determine whether or not to create a stage transfer cell. As a result of the lottery, if it is determined to create a stage transition square, the map lottery process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined not to create a stage transition cell, (f) it is determined to create a blank cell, and the map lottery process is terminated.

  Here, “blank cell” means that even if the current location is a blank cell, state number update processing, lottery to determine whether to update the state number, lottery to determine whether to acquire a character, etc. This is a cell in which processing that is advantageous to the player is not performed, and processing for updating the state number to a state number that is disadvantageous to the player is not performed. That is, it is a mass that is neither advantageous nor disadvantageous for the player.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the sub CPU 402 performs a lottery to determine whether or not to create a map in the order of a confirmed cell, a battle cell, a chance cell, a character acquisition cell, and a stage transition cell. There is no limit. For example, the lottery order may be different based on the value stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405.

  In this case, for example, in the case where information relating to the character H or the character E is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405, whether a confirmed cell is created based on the confirmed cell lottery table. If a lottery for determining whether or not to be performed first, it becomes easier to create a fixed cell. Similarly, in the case where information relating to the character F or the character B is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405, whether or not to create a battle cell based on the battle cell lottery table is determined. If the lottery is performed first, the battle mass is more easily created. Similarly, in the case where information relating to the character F or the character A is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405, whether or not to create a chance mass based on the chance mass lottery table is determined. If the lottery is performed first, chance chances are more easily created. Similarly, in the case where information relating to the character G or the character D is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405, whether or not a character acquisition cell is created based on the character acquisition cell lottery table. If such a lottery is performed first, it becomes easier to create a character acquisition cell.

  On the other hand, when the character G or information related to the character C is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405, the lottery for determining whether or not to create an additional cell based on the additional cell lottery table. If this is performed first, the added mass is more easily created. In addition, in the case where information relating to the character G or the character D is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405, a lottery for determining whether or not to create an end cell based on the end cell lottery table. If this is done first, the end cell is more difficult to create.

(Step S302-3-12-2-4-1-10-5)
In step S302-3-12-2-4-1-10-5, the sub CPU 402 performs map storage processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 stores the map determined by the map lottery process in step S302-3-12-2-4-1-10-4 in a map information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. Do. Then, when the process of step S302-3-12-4-1-10-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-1-10-6.

  More specifically, when the value of the map creation counter provided in the sub RAM 405 is “1”, the sub CPU 402 stores the step S302-3 in the first map information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. When the map determined by the map lottery process of -12-4-1-10-4 is stored and the value of the map creation counter provided in the sub RAM 405 is “2”, the map is provided in the sub RAM 405. The map determined by the map lottery process in step S302-3-12-2-4-1-10-4 is stored in the second map information storage area, and the value of the map creation counter provided in the sub RAM 405 is “ 3 ”, the map of step S302-3-12-2-4-1-10-4 is stored in the third map information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If the map determined by the lottery process is stored and the value of the map creation counter provided in the sub RAM 405 is “4”, the map information is stored in the fourth map information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. Processing for storing the map determined by the map lottery processing of 3-12-4-1-10-4 is performed.

(Step S302-3-12-1-4-1-10-6)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-4-1-10-6, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the map creation counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 subtracts “1” from the value of the map creation counter provided in the sub RAM 405 by the processing of step S302-3-12-2-4-1-10-2, and as a result, the map creation counter The process of determining whether or not the value of “0” is “0” is performed. If it is determined that the value of the map creation counter is “0” (step S302-3-12-1-4-1-10-6 = Yes), the map creation processing subroutine is terminated and the roulette replay is performed. The processing shifts to step S302-3-12-4-2 of the display time processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the map creation counter is not “0” (step S302-3-12-4-1-10-6 = No), step S302-3-12-4-1- The processing is shifted to 10-2.

(Processing when the battle mass stops)
Next, based on FIG. 74, the battle mass stop process will be described. FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a subroutine for a battle mass stop process.

(Step S302-3-12-4-5-1)
In step S302-3-12-4-5-1, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not the state number is “01”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the state number is “01” based on a value stored in a state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the state number is “01” (step S302-3-12-4-5-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-5-2. If it is determined that the state number is not “01” (step S302-3-12-4-5-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-5-4. .

(Step S302-3-12-4-5-2)
In step S302-3-12-4-5-2, the sub CPU 402 performs a normal state battle lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs lottery as to whether or not to shift to the Bonus preparation state based on the battle mass Bonus preparation state transfer lottery table provided in the sub ROM 404 (see FIG. 40A). . Here, as a result of the lottery, if it is decided to shift to the Bonus preparation state, a continuous effect is performed by the liquid crystal display device 46, and eventually the player side character wins, When it is determined not to shift to the Bonus preparation state, a continuous effect is performed by the liquid crystal display device 46, and eventually the player's character is defeated. Then, when step S302-3-12-4-5-2 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-5-3.

(Step S302-3-12-4-5-3)
In step S302-3-12-4-5-3, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for setting a continuous effect counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for setting a predetermined value in a continuous effect counter provided in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-12-4-5-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-5-13.

  Note that the value of the continuous effect counter set by the process of step S302-3-12-4-5-3 can be set as appropriate. For example, (a) a predetermined value may be set, (b) a value of a continuous production counter to be set may be determined by lottery, or (c) step S302-3-12. In the effect determination process of step S302-3-12-14, the process of step S302-3-12-14 is not performed, and the continuous effect provided in the sub RAM 405 is determined based on the determined continuous effect. The value of the production counter may be set.

(Step S302-3-12-4-5-4)
In step S <b> 302-3-12-4-5-4, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the state number is “02”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the state number is “02” based on the value stored in the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the state number is “02” (step S302-3-12-4-5-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-5-5. If it is determined that the state number is not “02” (step S302-3-12-4-5-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-5-7. .

(Step S302-3-12-4-5-5)
In step S302-3-12-4-5-5, the sub CPU 402 performs a chance state battle lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs lottery as to whether or not to shift to the Bonus preparation state based on the battle mass Bonus preparation state transfer lottery table provided in the sub ROM 404 (see FIG. 40A). . Here, as a result of the lottery, if it is decided to shift to the Bonus preparation state, a continuous effect is performed by the liquid crystal display device 46, and eventually the player side character wins, When it is determined not to shift to the Bonus preparation state, a continuous effect is performed by the liquid crystal display device 46, and eventually the player's character is defeated. Then, when the process of step S302-3-12-4-5-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-5-6.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 402 performs the Bonus preparation state transfer lottery table for battle masses in the normal state Bonus preparation state transfer lottery process and the chance state Bonus preparation state transfer lottery process (see FIG. 40A). Based on the above, a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the Bonus preparation state is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a lottery table for a battle state Bonus preparation state transition lottery table for a normal state and a Bonus preparation state transition lottery table for a chance state may be provided to perform lottery. In this case, the lottery value related to the winning stipulated in the match mass Bonus preparation state transfer lottery table for the chance state is related to the winning stipulated in the normal state battle mass Bonus preparation state transfer lottery table. It is desirable that the value is larger than the lottery value.

(Step S302-3-12-4-5-6)
In step S302-3-12-4-5-6, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for setting a continuous effect counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for setting a predetermined value in a continuous effect counter provided in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-12-4-5-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-5-13.

  In addition, the value of the continuous effect counter set by the process of step S302-3-12-4-5-6 can be set as appropriate. For example, (a) a predetermined value may be set, (b) a value of a continuous production counter to be set may be determined by lottery, or (c) step S302-3-12. In the effect determination process in step S302-3-12-14, the process of step S302-3-12-14 is not performed, and the continuous effect provided in the sub RAM 405 is determined based on the determined continuous effect. The value of the production counter may be set.

(Step S302-3-12-4-5-7)
In step S302-3-12-4-5-7, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not the state number is “04”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the state number is “04” based on the value stored in the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the state number is “04” (step S302-3-12-4-5-7 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-5-8. If it is determined that the state number is not “04” (step S302-3-12-4-5-7 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-5-10. .

(Step S302-3-12-4-5-8)
In step S302-3-12-4-5-8, the sub CPU 402 performs an AT state battle lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the additional state A based on the competitive mass additional state A transition lottery table provided in the sub ROM 404 (see FIG. 40B). . Here, as a result of the lottery, if it is determined to shift to the added state A, a continuous effect is performed by the liquid crystal display device 46, and eventually the player side character wins, When it is determined not to shift to the added state A, a continuous effect is performed by the liquid crystal display device 46, and eventually the player's character is defeated. Then, when the process of step S302-3-12-4-5-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-5-9.

(Step S302-3-12-4-5-9)
In step S302-3-12-4-5-9, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting a continuous effect counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for setting a predetermined value in a continuous effect counter provided in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-12-4-5-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-5-13.

  Note that the value of the continuous effect counter set by the processing of step S302-3-12-4-5-9 can be set as appropriate. For example, (a) a predetermined value may be set, (b) a value of a continuous production counter to be set may be determined by lottery, or (c) step S302-3-12. In the effect determination process in step S302-3-12-14, without performing the process of -4-5-9, a continuous effect is determined, and the continuous RAM provided in the sub-RAM 405 is based on the determined continuous effect. The value of the production counter may be set.

(Step S302-3-12-4-5-10)
In step S302-3-12-4-5-10, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the state number is “05”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the state number is “05” based on the value stored in the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the state number is “05” (step S302-3-12-4-5-10 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-5-11. If it is determined that the state number is not “05” (step S302-3-12-4-5-10 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-5-13. To do.

(Step S302-3-12-4-5-11)
In step S302-3-12-4-5-11, the sub CPU 402 performs an extra state A battle lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the added state B based on the battle mass added state B shift lottery table provided in the sub ROM 404 (see FIG. 40C). . Here, as a result of the lottery, if it is decided to shift to the added state B, a continuous effect is performed by the liquid crystal display device 46, and eventually the player side character wins, When it is determined not to shift to the added state B, a continuous effect is performed by the liquid crystal display device 46, and eventually, the player's character is defeated. Then, when the process of step S302-3-12-4-5-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-5-12.

(Step S302-3-12-4-5-12)
In step S302-3-12-4-5-12, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting a continuous effect counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for setting a predetermined value in a continuous effect counter provided in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-12-4-5-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-5-13.

  Note that the value of the continuous effect counter set by the process of step S302-3-12-4-5-12 can be set as appropriate. For example, (a) a predetermined value may be set, (b) a value of a continuous production counter to be set may be determined by lottery, or (c) step S302-3-12. In the effect determination process in step S302-3-12-14, the process of step S302-3-12-14 is not performed, and the continuous effect provided in the sub RAM 405 is determined based on the determined continuous effect. The value of the production counter may be set.

(Step S302-3-12-4-5-13)
In step S302-3-12-4-5-13, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the character B is stored. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not information related to the character B is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that character B is stored (step S302-3-12-4-5-13 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-4-14. If it is determined that character B is not stored (step S302-3-12-4-5-13 = No), the subroutine of the battle mass stop process is terminated, and the display determination command reception process is completed. The process proceeds to step S302-3-12-13.

(Step S302-3-12-4-5-14)
In step S302-3-12-4-5-14, the sub CPU 402 performs character B erasure processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of deleting information related to the character B from the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. When the process of step S302-3-12-4-5-14 ends, the battle mass stop time process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-13 of the display determination command reception process. To do.

(Process when character acquisition trout stops)
Next, based on FIG. 75, the character acquisition mass stop process will be described. FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing when the character acquisition cell is stopped.

(Step S302-3-12-4-7-1)
In step S302-3-12-4-7-1, the sub CPU 402 performs a character acquisition lottery process. As described above, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of drawing whether or not to acquire a character. Then, when the process of step S302-3-12-4-7-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-7-2.

(Step S302-3-12-4-7-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-12-4-7-2, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not a character has been acquired by the character acquisition lottery process in step S302-3-12-4-7-1. And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-12-4-7-2 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-12-4-7-3, and is not winning If it is determined (step S302-3-12-4-7-2 = No), the subroutine for the character acquisition cell stop process is terminated, and the display determination command reception process is performed in step S302-3-12. The processing is shifted to 13.

(Step S302-3-12-4-7-3)
In step S302-3-12-4-7-3, the sub CPU 402 performs character storage processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 stores information relating to the character acquired by the character acquisition lottery process in step S302-3-12-4-7-1 in a character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. I do. Then, when the process of step S302-3-12-4-7-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-7-4.

(Step S302-3-12-4-7-4)
In step S302-3-12-4-7-4, the sub CPU 402 performs character combination processing. As described above, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring other characters based on the currently acquired character. When the process of step S302-3-12-4-7-4 is completed, the subroutine for the character acquisition cell stop process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-13 of the display determination command reception process. Transition.

(Processing when chance mass is stopped)
Next, the chance mass stop time process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a subroutine of chance mass stop time processing.

(Step S302-3-12-4-9-1)
In step S302-3-12-4-9-1, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the state number is “01”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the state number is “01” based on a value stored in a state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the state number is “01” (step S302-3-12-4-9-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-9-2. If it is determined that the state number is not “01” (step S302-3-12-4-9-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-9-5. .

(Step S302-3-12-4-9-2)
In step S302-3-12-4-9-2, the sub CPU 402 performs a normal state bonus preparation state transition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs lottery as to whether or not to shift to the Bonus preparation state based on the chance mass Bonus preparation state transfer lottery table provided in the sub ROM 404 (see FIG. 39A). . Then, when the process of step S302-3-12-4-9-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-9-3.

(Step S302-3-12-4-9-3)
In step S302-3-12-4-9-3, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the normal state Bonus preparation state transition lottery process of step S302-3-12-4-9-2 has been won. And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-12-4-9-3 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-12-4-9-4, and is not winning Is determined (step S302-3-12-4-9-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-9-18.

(Step S302-3-12-4-9-4)
In step S302-3-12-4-9-4, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “07” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to update the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 to “07”. Then, when the process of step S302-3-12-4-9-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-9-18.

(Step S302-3-12-4-9-5)
In step S302-3-12-4-9-5, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the state number is “02”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the state number is “02” based on the value stored in the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the state number is “02” (step S302-3-12-4-9-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-9-6. If it is determined that the state number is not “02” (step S302-3-12-4-9-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-9-9. .

(Step S302-3-12-4-9-6)
In step S302-3-12-4-9-6, the sub CPU 402 performs a chance state Bonus preparation state transition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs lottery as to whether or not to shift to the Bonus preparation state based on the chance mass Bonus preparation state transfer lottery table provided in the sub ROM 404 (see FIG. 39A). . Then, when the process of step S302-3-12-4-9-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-9-7.

(Step S302-3-12-4-9-7)
In step S302-3-12-4-9-7, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the chance state Bonus preparation state transition lottery process of step S302-3-12-4-9-6 has been won. And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-12-4-9-7 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-12-4-9-8, and is not winning. If it is determined (step S302-3-12-4-9-7 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-9-18.

(Step S302-3-12-4-9-8)
In step S302-3-12-4-9-8, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “07” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to update the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 to “07”. Then, when the process of step S302-3-12-4-9-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-9-18.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 402 performs the chance mass Bonus preparation state transition lottery process in the normal state Bonus preparation state transition lottery process and the chance state Bonus preparation state transition lottery process (see FIG. 39A). Based on the above, a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the Bonus preparation state is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a chance mass Bonus preparation state transfer lottery table for the normal state and a chance mass Bonus preparation state transfer lottery table for the chance state may be provided to perform the lottery. In this case, the lottery value related to the winning stipulated in the chance state Bonus ready state transition lottery table for the chance state is related to the winning stipulated in the chance state Bonus preparatory state transition lottery table for the normal state. It is desirable that the value is larger than the lottery value.

(Step S302-3-12-4-9-9)
In step S302-3-12-4-9-9, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the state number is “04”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the state number is “04” based on the value stored in the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the state number is “04” (step S302-3-12-4-9-9 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-9-10. If it is determined that the state number is not “04” (step S302-3-12-4-9-9 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-9-13. .

(Step S302-3-12-4-9-10)
In step S302-3-12-4-9-10, the sub CPU 402 performs an extra state A shift lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the additional state A based on the chance state additional state A transition lottery table provided in the sub ROM 404 (see FIG. 39B). . Then, when the process of step S302-3-12-4-9-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-9-11.

(Step S302-3-12-4-9-11)
In step S302-3-12-4-9-11, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the riding state A transition lottery process of step S302-3-12-4-9-10 has been won. And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-12-4-9-11 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-12-4-9-12, and is not winning If it is determined (step S302-3-12-4-9-11 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-9-18.

(Step S302-3-12-4-9-12)
In step S302-3-12-4-9-12, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “05” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of updating the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 to “05”. Then, when the process of step S302-3-12-4-9-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-9-18.

(Step S302-3-12-4-9-13)
In step S302-3-12-4-9-13, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the state number is “05”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the state number is “05” based on the value stored in the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the state number is “05” (step S302-3-12-4-9-13 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-9-14. If it is determined that the state number is not “05” (step S302-3-12-4-9-13 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-9-18. .

(Step S302-3-12-4-9-14)
In step S302-3-12-4-9-14, the sub CPU 402 performs an extra state B transition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the additional state B based on the chance mass additional state B transition lottery table provided in the sub ROM 404 (see FIG. 39C). . Then, when the process of step S302-3-12-4-9-14 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-9-15.

(Step S302-3-12-4-9-15)
In step S302-3-12-4-9-15, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the riding state B transition lottery process of step S302-3-12-4-9-14 has been won. And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-12-4-9-15 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-12-4-9-16 and is not winning. If it is determined (step S302-3-12-4-9-15 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-9-18.

(Step S302-3-12-4-9-16)
In step S302-3-12-4-9-16, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “06” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to update the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 to “06”. Then, when the process of step S302-3-12-4-9-16 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-9-17.

(Step S302-3-12-4-9-17)
In step S <b> 302-3-12-4-9-17, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for setting “20” to the added state B game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “20” in the added state B game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-12-4-9-17 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-9-18.

(Step S302-3-12-4-9-18)
In step S302-3-12-4-9-18, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the character A is stored. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not information related to the character A is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that character A is stored (step S302-3-12-4-9-18 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-9-19. If it is determined that the character A is not stored (step S302-3-12-4-9-18 = No), the chance mass stop time processing subroutine is terminated, and the display determination command reception time processing is completed. The process proceeds to step S302-3-12-13.

(Step S302-3-12-4-5-19)
In step S302-3-12-4-5-19, the sub CPU 402 performs a character A erasing process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for erasing information related to the character A from the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. When the process of step S302-3-12-4-9-19 ends, the subroutine for the chance mass stop time process ends, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-13 of the display determination command reception process. To do.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although it is supposed that a continuous effect is performed only when it stops at a battle | competition mass, it is not limited to this. For example, continuous production may be performed even when the chance mass is stopped.

(Processing when fixed mass is stopped)
Next, based on FIG. 77, the process at the fixed mass stop time will be described. Note that FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing at the time of stop of the fixed mass.

(Step S302-3-12-4-11-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-12-4-11-1, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the state number is “01”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the state number is “01” based on a value stored in a state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the state number is “01” (step S302-3-12-4-11-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-11-2. If it is determined that the state number is not “01” (step S302-3-12-4-11-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-11-3. .

(Step S302-3-12-4-11-2)
In step S302-3-12-4-11-2, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “07” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to update the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 to “07”. Then, when the process of step S302-3-12-4-11-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-11-10.

(Step S302-3-12-4-11-3)
In step S302-3-12-4-11-3, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the state number is “02”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the state number is “02” based on the value stored in the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the state number is “02” (step S302-3-12-4-11-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-11-4. If it is determined that the state number is not “02” (step S302-3-12-4-11-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-11-5. .

(Step S302-3-12-4-11-4)
In step S302-3-12-4-11-4, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “07” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to update the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 to “07”. Then, when the process of step S302-3-12-4-11-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-11-10.

(Step S302-3-12-4-11-5)
In step S302-3-12-4-11-5, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the state number is “04”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the state number is “04” based on the value stored in the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the state number is “04” (step S302-3-12-4-11-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-11-6. If it is determined that the state number is not “04” (step S302-3-12-4-11-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-11-7. .

(Step S302-3-12-4-11-6)
In step S302-3-12-4-11-6, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “05” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of updating the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 to “05”. Then, when the process of step S302-3-12-4-11-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-11-10.

(Step S302-3-12-4-11-7)
In step S302-3-12-4-11-7, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the state number is “05”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the state number is “05” based on the value stored in the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the state number is “05” (step S302-3-12-4-11-7 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-11-8. If it is determined that the state number is not “05” (step S302-3-12-4-11-7 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-11-10. .

(Step S302-3-12-4-11-8)
In step S302-3-12-4-11-8, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “06” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to update the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 to “06”. Then, when the process of step S302-3-12-4-11-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-11-9.

(Step S302-3-12-4-11-9)
In step S <b> 302-3-12-4-11-9, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for setting “20” in the added state B game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “20” in the added state B game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-12-4-11-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-11-10.

(Step S302-3-12-4-11-10)
In step S302-3-12-4-11-10, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the character E is stored. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not information related to the character E is stored in a character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the character E is stored (step S302-3-12-4-11-10 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-11-11. When it is determined that the character E is not stored (step S302-3-12-4-11-10 = No), the subroutine for the fixed mass stop process is terminated, and the display determination command reception process is completed. The process proceeds to step S302-3-12-13.

(Step S302-3-12-4-11-11)
In step S302-3-12-4-11-11, the sub CPU 402 performs character E erasure processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of deleting information related to the character E from the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-12-4-11-11 is completed, the subroutine for the process for stopping the fixed cell is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-13 for the process for receiving the display determination command. To do.

(Processing when the additional mass is stopped)
Next, based on FIG. 78, the process at the time of the additional mass stop will be described. FIG. 78 is a diagram showing a subroutine for the process of stopping the added mass.

(Step S302-3-12-4-13-1)
In step S302-3-12-4-13-1, the sub CPU 402 performs AT state game number counter addition processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of adding to the value of the AT state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405 according to the stopped addition cell. Then, when the process of step S302-3-12-4-13-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-13-2.

(Step S302-3-12-4-13-2)
In step S302-3-12-4-13-2, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the character C is stored. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not information related to the character C is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that character C is stored (step S302-3-12-4-13-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-13-3. If it is determined that the character C is not stored (step S302-3-12-4-13-2 = No), the subroutine for the process for stopping the added cell is terminated and the process for receiving the display determination command is completed. The process proceeds to step S302-3-12-13.

(Step S302-3-12-4-13-3)
In step S302-3-12-4-13-3, the sub CPU 402 performs a character C erasing process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of deleting information related to the character C from the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-12-4-13-3 is completed, the subroutine for the added mass stop process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-13 of the display determination command reception process. To do.

(Process when stage transition mass is stopped)
Next, the stage transition mass stop process will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a subroutine of stage transition mass stop processing.

(Step S302-3-12-4-15-1)
In step S302-3-12-4-15-1, the sub CPU 402 performs a normal stage drawing process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 determines the destination stage based on the stage lottery table (see FIG. 38) and information on the current stage stored in the stage information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. The process of determining is performed. More specifically, when information related to the stage A is stored in the stage information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405, the stage A stay stage lottery table (see FIG. 38A) is used. If the information related to stage B is stored in the stage information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405, the stage B stay stage stage lottery table (see FIG. 38B) is used. Make a lottery. Then, when the process of step S302-3-12-4-15-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-15-2.

(Step S302-3-12-4-15-2)
In step S302-3-12-4-15-2, the sub CPU 402 performs stage storage information update processing. Specifically, as a result of performing the normal state stage lottery processing in step S302-3-12-4-15-, the sub CPU 402 relates to the stage of the transfer destination in the stage information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. Process to store information. Then, when the process of step S302-3-12-4-15-2 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-15-3.

(Step S302-3-12-4-15-3)
In step S302-3-12-4-15-3, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not to shift to the chance state. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not it is determined to shift to the chance state as a result of performing the normal state stage lottery process of step S302-3-12-4-15-1. Do. And when it determines with shifting to a chance state (step S302-3-12-4-15-3 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-12-4-15-4, and a chance state If it is determined not to shift to (step S302-3-12-4-15-3 = No), the subroutine for the stage shift mass stop process is terminated, and the display determination command reception process is performed in step S302-3. The process is shifted to -12-13.

(Step S302-3-12-4-15-4)
In step S302-3-12-4-15-4, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “02” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to update the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 to “02”. When the process of step S302-3-12-4-15-4 is completed, the subroutine for the stage transition mass stop process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-13 of the display determination command reception process. Transition.

(Processing at the end mass stop)
Next, based on FIG. 80, the process at the end mass stop time will be described. FIG. 80 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the process for stopping the end cell.

(Step S302-3-12-4-17-1)
In step S302-3-12-4-17-1, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the state number is “02”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the state number is “02” based on the value stored in the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the state number is “02” (step S302-3-12-4-17-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-17-2. If it is determined that the state number is not “02” (step S302-3-12-4-17-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-17-3. .

(Step S302-3-12-4-17-2)
In step S302-3-12-4-17-2, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “01” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to update the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 to “01”. When the process of step S302-3-12-4-17-2 is completed, the subroutine for the process of stopping the end cell is ended, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-13 of the process for receiving the display determination command. To do.

(Step S302-3-12-4-17-3)
In step S302-3-12-4-17-3, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the state number is “04”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the state number is “04” based on the value stored in the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the state number is “04” (step S302-3-12-4-17-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-17-4. If it is determined that the state number is not “04” (step S302-3-12-4-17-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-17-9. .

(Step S302-3-12-4-17-4)
In step S302-3-12-4-17-4, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not the value of the AT state set number counter is “1” or more. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the AT state set number counter provided in the sub RAM 405 is “1” or more. When it is determined that the value of the AT state set number counter is “1” or more (step S302-3-12-4-17-4 = Yes), step S302-3-12-4- If the process proceeds to 17-5 and it is determined that the value of the AT state set number counter is not equal to or greater than “1” (step S302-3-12-4-17-4 = No), step S302 is performed. The process shifts to -3-12-4-17-7.

(Step S302-3-12-4-17-5)
In step S302-3-12-4-17-5, the sub CPU 402 performs processing of subtracting “1” from the value of the AT state set number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the AT state set number counter provided in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-12-4-17-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-17-6.

(Step S302-3-12-4-17-6)
In step S302-3-12-4-17-6, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for setting the value of the AT state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for setting the value of the AT state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405. When the processing of step S302-3-12-4-17-6 ends, the subroutine for the end cell stop process ends, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-13 of the display determination command reception process. To do.

  Note that the value set in the AT state game number counter provided in the sub-RAM 405 can be set as appropriate. For example, (a) a predetermined value may be set in the AT state game number counter, or (b) a value determined by lottery may be set in the AT state game number counter.

  Further, (c) the value set in the blue 7 middle stage replay display process (see FIG. 82) described later or the value set in the red 7 replay display process (see FIG. 83) is used as the AT state game number counter. May be set. In this case, it is necessary to store the value set in the Bonus state game number counter provided in the sub-RAM 405 when shifting from the Bonus preparation state to the Bonus state. Thereby, since the technical intervention property at the time of shifting from the Bonus preparation state to the Bonus state is improved, the interest in the game is improved for the advanced player who can push forward.

(Step S302-3-12-4-17-7)
In step S302-3-12-4-17-7, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “01” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to update the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 to “01”. Then, when the process of step S302-3-12-4-17-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-17-8.

(Step S302-3-12-4-17-8)
In step S <b> 302-3-12-4-17-8, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for setting “1225” to the value of the Bonus preparation state transition game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “1225” to the value of the bonus preparation state transition game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405. When the process of step S302-3-12-4-17-8 is completed, the subroutine for the end cell stop process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-13 of the display determination command reception process. To do.

(Step S302-3-12-4-17-9)
In step S302-3-12-4-17-9, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not the state number is “05”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the state number is “05” based on the value stored in the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the state number is “05” (step S302-3-12-4-17-9 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4-17-10. However, if it is determined that the state number is not “05” (step S302-3-12-4-17-9 = No), the subroutine for the end cell stop process is terminated, and the process for receiving the display determination command is performed. The process proceeds to step S302-3-12-13.

(Step S302-3-12-4-17-10)
In step S302-3-12-4-17-10, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “04” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to update the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 to “04”. When the process of step S302-3-12-4-17-10 is completed, the subroutine for the end cell stop process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-13 of the display determination command reception process. To do.

(Normal replay display processing)
Next, normal replay display processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing a subroutine of normal replay display processing.

(Step S302-3-12-6-1)
In step S302-3-12-6-1, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the progress mass counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the progress mass counter provided in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-12-6-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-6-2.

(Step S302-3-12-6-2)
In step S302-3-12-6-2, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not the value of the progress mass counter is “5”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not the value of the progress mass counter provided in the sub RAM 405 is “5”. If it is determined that the value of the progress mass counter is “5” (step S302-3-12-6-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-6-3, When it is determined that the value of the progress mass counter is not “5” (step S302-3-12-6-2 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-6-4.

(Step S302-3-12-6-3)
In step S302-3-12-6-3, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “1” to the value of the progress mass counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “1” to the value of the progress mass counter provided in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-12-6-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-6-4.

(Step S302-3-12-6-4)
In step S302-3-12-6-4, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the character F is stored. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not information related to the character F is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the character F is stored (step S302-3-12-6-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-6-5, and the character F When it is determined that it is not stored (step S302-3-12-6-4 = No), the normal replay display time process subroutine is terminated, and the display determination command reception time process step S302-3-12. The process is shifted to -13.

(Step S302-3-12-6-5)
In step S302-3-12-6-5, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the normal replay establishment number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the normal replay establishment number counter provided in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-12-6-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-6-6.

(Step S302-3-12-6-6)
In step S302-3-12-6-6, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not the value of the normal replay establishment number counter is “20”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 adds “1” to the value of the normal replay establishment number counter in the process of step S302-3-12-6-5, and as a result, the normal replay establishment number counter provided in the sub RAM 405 is obtained. The process of determining whether or not the value of “20” is “20” is performed. If it is determined that the value of the normal replay establishment number counter is “20” (step S302-3-12-6-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-6-7. If it is determined that the value of the normal replay establishment number counter is not “20” (step S302-3-12-6-6 = No), the normal replay display time processing subroutine is terminated and displayed. The processing shifts to step S302-3-12-13 of the determination command reception processing.

(Step S302-3-12-6-7)
In step S302-3-12-6-7, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the normal replay establishment number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the normal replay establishment number counter provided in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-12-6-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-6-8.

(Step S302-3-12-6-8)
In step S302-3-12-6-8, the sub CPU 402 performs character F erasure processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of deleting information related to the character F from the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. When the process of step S302-3-12-6-8 ends, the subroutine of the normal replay display process ends, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-13 of the display determination command reception process.

(Blue 7 middle stage replay display processing)
Next, based on FIG. 82, the process at the time of replay display at the middle of blue 7 will be described. FIG. 82 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the replay display time process for blue 7 middle stage.

(Step S302-3-12-8-1)
In step S302-3-12-8-1, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the state number is “07”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the state number is “07” based on the value stored in the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the state number is “07” (step S302-3-12-8-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-8-2, and the state number is set. Is determined not to be “07” (step S302-3-12-8-1 = No), the blue 7 middle stage replay display time processing subroutine is terminated, and the display determination command reception time processing step S302 is completed. The process is transferred to -3-12-13.

(Step S302-3-12-8-2)
In step S302-3-12-8-2, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “40” to the value of the Bonus state game number counter and the value of the AT state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “40” to the value of the Bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405 and the value of the AT state game number counter. Then, when the process of step S302-3-12-8-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-8-3.

(Step S302-3-12-8-3)
In step S302-3-12-8-3, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “03” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to update the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 to “03”. Then, when the process of step S302-3-12-8-3 is completed, the blue 7 middle stage replay display process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-13 of the display determination command reception process. Transition.

(Red 7 replay display processing)
Next, red 7 replay display processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a diagram showing a subroutine of red 7 replay display processing.

(Step S302-3-12-10-1)
In step S302-3-12-10-1, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the state number is “07”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the state number is “07” based on the value stored in the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the state number is “07” (step S302-3-12-10-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-10-2, and the state number Is determined not to be “07” (step S302-3-12-10-1 = No), the red 7 replay display time processing subroutine is terminated, and the display determination command reception time processing step S302-3 is completed. The process is shifted to -12-13.

(Step S302-3-12-10-2)
In step S302-3-12-10-2, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the red 7 diagonally aligned replay 01 is established. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 determines that the symbol combination related to “Red 7 diagonally aligned replay 01” is on the active line based on the information related to the display determination command stored by the game information storage processing in step S302-2. A process of determining whether or not it is displayed is performed. If it is determined that the red 7 diagonally aligned replay 01 has been established (step S302-3-12-10-2 = YES), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-10-3, and red When it is determined that the 7 diagonally aligned replay 01 is not established (step S302-3-12-10-2 = NO), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-10-4.

(Step S302-3-12-10-3)
In step S302-3-12-10-3, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “50” to the value of the Bonus state game number counter and the value of the AT state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “50” to the value of the bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405 and the value of the AT state game number counter. Then, when the process of step S302-3-12-10-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-10-5.

(Step S302-3-12-10-4)
In step S302-3-12-10-4, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “30” to the value of the Bonus state game number counter and the value of the AT state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “30” to the value of the Bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405 and the value of the AT state game number counter. Then, when the process of step S302-3-12-10-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-10-5.

(Step S302-3-12-10-5)
In step S302-3-12-10-5, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “03” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to update the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 to “03”. When the processing of step S302-3-12-10-5 ends, the subroutine for red 7 replay display processing ends, and the processing proceeds to step S302-3-12-13 of processing for display determination command reception. .

(Process when winning a bell)
Next, the bell winning process will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the process for winning a bell.

(Step S302-3-12-12-1)
In step S302-3-12-12-1, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the character G is stored. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not information related to the character G is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the character G is stored (step S302-3-12-12-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-12-2, and the character G If it is determined that it is not stored (step S302-3-12-12-1 = No), the bell winning time processing subroutine is terminated, and the display determination command receiving time processing step S302-3-12-. The processing is shifted to 13.

(Step S302-3-12-12-2)
In step S302-3-12-12-2, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the bell continuous winning flag is ON. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the bell continuous winning flag is ON based on a value stored in a bell continuous winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the bell continuous winning flag is ON (step S302-3-12-12-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-12-4, and the bell continuous If it is determined that the winning flag is not ON (step S302-3-12-12-2 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-12-3.

(Step S302-3-12-12-3)
In step S302-3-12-12-3, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for turning on the bell continuous winning flag. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for turning on the bell continuous winning flag in the bell continuous winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-12-12-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-12-4.

(Step S302-3-12-12-4)
In step S302-3-12-12-4, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the bell continuous winning counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the bell continuous winning counter provided in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-12-12-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-12-5.

(Step S302-3-12-12-5)
In step S302-3-12-12-5, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the consecutive bell winning counter is “5”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the bell continuous winning counter provided in the sub RAM 405 is “5”. If it is determined that the value of the bell continuous winning counter is “5” (step S302-3-12-12-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-12-6. If it is determined that the value of the bell continuous winning counter is not “5” (step S302-3-12-12-5 = No), the bell winning process subroutine is terminated and the display determination command is received. The processing shifts to step S302-3-12-13 of the time processing.

(Step S302-3-12-12-6)
In step S302-3-12-12-6, the sub CPU 402 performs character G erasure processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of deleting information related to the character G from the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. When the process of step S302-3-12-12-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-12-7.

(Step S302-3-12-12-7)
In step S302-3-12-12-7, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the bell continuous winning counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the bell continuous winning counter provided in the sub RAM 405. When the process of step S302-3-12-12-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-12-8.

(Step S302-3-12-12-8)
In step S302-3-12-12-8, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for turning off the bell continuous winning flag. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for turning off the bell continuous winning flag in the bell continuous winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. When the process of step S302-3-12-12-8 is completed, the bell winning time process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-13 of the display determination command receiving process.

  As described above, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for turning off the bell continuous winning flag in the bell continuous winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 when the value of the bell continuous winning counter becomes “5”. In addition to this, the symbol combination related to “Bell” is not displayed on the active line based on the information related to the display determination command stored by the game information storage process of step S302-2. In this case, a process of turning off the bell continuous winning flag in the bell continuous winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 is also performed. Thereby, the sub CPU 402 counts the number of times “Bell” has won continuously.

(Character memory erasure judgment processing)
Next, the character memory erasure determination process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85 shows a subroutine of character memory erasure determination processing.

(Step S302-3-12-13-1)
In step S302-3-12-13-1, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the character D is stored. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not information related to the character D is stored in a character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the character D is stored (step S302-3-12-13-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-13-2, and the character D If it is determined that it is not stored (step S302-3-12-13-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-13-5.

(Step S302-3-12-13-2)
In step S302-3-12-13-2, the sub CPU 402 performs a character D deletion lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 relates to the character D stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 based on the character D deletion lottery table (not shown) provided in the sub ROM 404. A lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to delete information. Then, when the process of step S302-3-12-13-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-13-3.

  Note that the lottery values in the character D deletion lottery table can be set as appropriate. For example, by specifying a lottery value that is determined to delete information related to the character D from the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405, it becomes difficult for the player to receive the privilege, while the player is provided with the sub RAM 405. By defining the lottery value determined to delete the information related to the character D from the stored character information storage area, the player can easily receive a privilege.

(Step S302-3-12-13-3)
In step S302-3-12-13-3, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not to erase the character D. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 decides to delete information related to the character D from the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 by the character D deletion lottery process in step S302-3-12-13-2. The process which determines whether it was carried out is performed. If it is determined that the character D is to be erased (step S302-3-12-13-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-13-4, and the character D must be erased. If it is determined (step S302-3-12-13-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-13-5.

(Step S302-3-12-13-4)
In step S302-3-12-13-4, the sub CPU 402 performs character D erasure processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of deleting information related to the character D from the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-12-13-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-13-5.

(Step S302-3-12-13-5)
In step S302-3-12-13-5, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the character H is stored. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not information related to the character H is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the character H is stored (step S302-3-12-13-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-13-6, and the character H If it is determined that it is not stored (step S302-3-12-13-5 = No), the subroutine for character memory erasure determination processing is terminated, and step S302-3-12 of the display determination command reception processing is ended. The process is shifted to -14.

(Step S302-3-12-13-6)
In step S302-3-12-13-6, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the character H game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the character H game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-12-13-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-13-7.

(Step S302-3-12-13-7)
In step S302-3-12-13-7, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the character H game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 subtracts “1” from the value of the character H game number counter by the process of step S302-3-12-13-6, and as a result, the character H game provided in the sub RAM 405 is obtained. A process of determining whether or not the value of the number counter is “0” is performed. If it is determined that the value of the character H game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-12-13-7 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-13-8. , And if it is determined that the value of the character H game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-12-13-7 = No), the subroutine for character memory erasure determination processing is terminated. Then, the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-14 of the display determination command reception process.

(Step S302-3-12-13-8)
In step S302-3-12-13-8, the sub CPU 402 performs character H erasure processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of deleting information related to the character H from the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. When the process of step S302-3-12-13-8 is completed, the character storage erasure determination process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-14 of the display determination command reception process.

  In the present embodiment, when it is determined to shift the state managed by the sub-control board 400, a map switching process is performed. Specifically, when it is determined that the state managed by the sub control board 400 is (a) transition from the normal state to the chance state, (b) the sub CPU 402 may transition from the chance state to the normal state. When determined, (c) When it is determined to shift from the AT state to the normal state, (d) When it is determined to shift from the AT state to the added state A, (e) From the added state A to the AT When it is determined to shift to a state, a process for creating a map after the shift is performed.

  For example, when it is determined to shift from the normal state to the chance state, if the information related to the stage transition cell is stored in the map information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405, the stage transition unit stops. Inconvenience will occur. Similarly, when it is determined to shift from the chance state to the normal state, if the information related to the end cell remains stored in the map information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405, the operation stops at the end cell. Inconvenience. For this reason, when it is determined that the state managed by the sub control board 400 is to be transferred, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of creating a map again.

  Here, the sub CPU 402 performs the above-described map switching process when information relating to a cell that is not created in the post-migration state is stored in the map information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. It is good as well. As a result, the above-described inconvenience is eliminated, and the map information is not stored again in the map information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405 when the information related to the square that is not created in the post-migration state is stored. Since it is not necessary to create, the processing load of the sub-control board 400 can be reduced. In addition, a situation in which information relating to a cell that is advantageous to the player is stored in a map information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405 does not occur.

  On the other hand, the sub CPU 402 performs the above-described map switching process regardless of whether or not information relating to a cell that is not created in the state after the transition is stored in the map information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. It is good also as performing. This eliminates the above-mentioned inconvenience and allows a game to be played with a sense of expectation when information relating to a cell advantageous to the player is not stored in the map information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405. it can.

(Animation displayed on the liquid crystal display device under normal conditions)
Next, an animation displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 in the normal state will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the normal state, the display area displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 includes (a) a stage display area 601 for displaying the stage, (b) a character display area 602 for displaying the acquired character, and (c ) A map display area 603 for displaying a map, and (d) a progress mass display area 604 for displaying a progress mass are provided.

(Stage display area 601)
The stage display area 601 is provided for displaying information relating to the stage stored in the stage information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405 in the normal state. FIG. 86 shows an animation displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 when information relating to the stage A is stored in the stage information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405.

(Character display area 602)
The character display area 602 is provided for displaying information relating to the character stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. Here, the character display area 602 includes (a) a character A information display area for displaying that information related to the character A is stored in a character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 05, and (b) ) Character B information display area for displaying that information related to the character B is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 05, and (c) Character information storage provided in the sub RAM 05. Information relating to the character D is stored in a character C information display area for displaying that information relating to the character C is stored in the area, and (d) a character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 05. A character D information display area for displaying that the character is displayed, and (e) a key provided in the sub RAM 05. Information relating to character F in the character E information display area for displaying that information relating to character E is stored in the lactor information storage area, and (f) the character information storage area provided in sub-RAM 05 For displaying that information related to the character G is stored in the character F information display area for displaying that the character G is stored, and (g) the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 05. A character G information display area; (h) a character H information display area for displaying that information relating to the character H is stored in a character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 05; and (i) a hero. A hero character display area for displaying characters is provided.

(Map display area 603)
The map display area 603 is provided for displaying information stored in a map information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. Here, the map display area 603 includes (a) a first map information display area for displaying information stored in a first map information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405, and (b) a sub RAM 405. A second map information display area for displaying information stored in the second map information storage area provided; and (c) a third map information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405. A third map information display area for displaying information, and (d) a fourth map information display area for displaying information stored in the fourth map information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405 are provided. ing. A frame image indicating the current location is displayed on the front side of the first map information display area.

  In FIG. 86, information related to the chance cell is stored in the first map information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405, and information related to the blank cell is stored in the second map information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405. Is stored in the third map information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405, and information relating to the blank square is stored in the fourth map information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405. The animation displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 is shown.

(Progressive mass display area 604)
The progress mass display area 604 is provided to display the value of the progress mass counter provided in the sub RAM 405. Here, the progress mass display area 604 includes (a) a first progress mass counter display area that is lit when the progress mass counter value is “1”, and (b) a progress mass counter value that is “2”. The second progress mass counter display area that is lit up, (c) the third progress mass counter display area that is lit when the value of the progress mass counter is “3”, and (d) the value of the progress mass counter is “4”. In this case, a fourth progress mass counter display area that is lit is provided.

  FIG. 86 shows an animation displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 when the value of the progress mass counter provided in the sub RAM 405 is “1”. Therefore, the sub CPU 402 notifies that the value of the progress mass counter provided in the sub RAM 405 is “1” by lighting or blinking the first progress mass counter display area.

(Animation displayed on the LCD in the Bonus ready state)
Next, the animation displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 in the Bonus preparation state will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the Bonus preparation state, the sub CPU 402 displays an animation as shown in FIG. 87 on the liquid crystal display based on the fact that the information related to the winning area “23” or “24” is stored by the game information storing process of step S302-2. Control to display on the device 46 is performed.

  In the present embodiment, in the Bonus preparation state, the animation as shown in FIG. 87 is based on the fact that the information related to the winning area “23” or “24” is stored by the game information storage process in step S302-2. Is controlled to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46, but is not limited thereto. For example, instead of displaying on the liquid crystal display device 46 a method that can display a combination of symbols related to (a) “blue 7 middle level replay” on the effective line, a combination of symbols related to “red 7 diagonally aligned replay 01” May be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46, and (b) a method of displaying a combination of symbols related to “Red 7 diagonally aligned replay 01” on the effective line; The liquid crystal display device 46 may display a method capable of displaying a combination of symbols related to “blue 7 middle stage uniform replay” on an effective line.

  In addition, (c) in the Bonus preparation state, the number of times the symbol combination related to “Red 7 diagonally aligned replay 01” is displayed on the active line is counted. The method of displaying the combination of symbols related to "" on the effective line, or the method of displaying the combination of symbols related to "Blue 7 middle stage replay" on the effective line may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46. (D) In the Bonus ready state, the probability that the symbol combination related to “Red 7 diagonally aligned replay 01” is displayed on the active line is calculated, and based on the calculation result, “Red 7 diagonally aligned replay 01” The combination of symbols related to "" can be displayed on the active line, or the combination of symbols related to "Blue 7 middle level replay" is displayed on the effective line. Possible ways may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 a.

(Reel 17 stop mode when replay is displayed in the middle of blue 7)
Next, based on FIG. 88, the stop mode of the reel 17 at the time of replay display of the blue 7 middle stage is described.

  FIG. 88 shows a liquid crystal display of an animation as shown in FIG. 87 based on the fact that information relating to the winning area “23” or “24” is stored by the game information storage processing in step S302-2 in the Bonus preparation state. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a reel stop mode when the player operates the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 in accordance with the information displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 after being displayed on the device 46. FIG.

  First, when the winning area “23” is determined by the internal lottery process, the main CPU 301 sets the stop table X as the stop table selection table by the process of step S111. As shown in FIG. 88 (a), the main CPU 301 determines that the symbol position is “12” and the right stop switch 13sw detects an operation of the right stop button 13 in a state where the reels 17 are all rotating. , “Table_R — 16” is selected, and “0” is acquired as the number of sliding frames. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 88A, the stop position of the right reel 17c is “12”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (b), the main CPU 301 stops at the symbol position “08” while the left reel 17a and the middle reel 17b are rotating and the right reel 17c is stopped. When the switch 12sw detects the operation of the middle stop button 12, “table_C_15” is set. Then, “0” is acquired as the number of sliding frames. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 88 (b), the stop position of the middle reel 17b is “08”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (c), the main CPU 301 detects that the left stop switch 11sw detects the operation of the left stop button 11 when the symbol position is “11” while only the left reel 17a is rotating. To "table_L_02". Then, “0” is acquired as the number of sliding frames. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 88 (c), the stop position of the left reel 17a is "11".

  In this way, the player operates from the right stop button 13 and aims at the symbol related to “blue 7”, so that blue 7 is aligned in the middle stage, and the value of the AT state game number counter is “40”. Will be set.

(Reel 17 stop mode when red 7 diagonally replay 01 is displayed)
Next, based on FIG. 89, the stop mode of the reel 17 when the red 7 diagonally aligned replay 01 is displayed will be described.

  FIG. 89 is similar to FIG. 88 and is shown in FIG. 87 based on the fact that information related to the winning area “23” or “24” is stored by the game information storage process in step S302-2 in the Bonus preparation state. After the animation is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46, the reel stop mode when the player operates the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 without following the information displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 is shown. It is.

  First, when the winning area “23” is determined by the internal lottery process, the main CPU 301 sets the stop table X as the stop table selection table by the process of step S111. As shown in FIG. 89 (a), the main CPU 301 determines that the symbol position is “18” and the middle stop switch 12sw detects the operation of the middle stop button 12 in a state where the reels 17 are all rotating. , “Table_C — 14” is selected, and “0” is acquired as the number of sliding frames. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 89 (a), the stop position of the middle reel 17b is “18”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (b), the main CPU 301 stops at the right position when the symbol position is “18” while the left reel 17a and the right reel 17c are rotating and the middle reel 17b is stopped. When the switch 13sw detects the operation of the right stop button 13, “table_R_3” is set. Then, “0” is acquired as the number of sliding frames. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 89 (b), the stop position of the middle reel 17b is “18”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (c), when the main CPU 301 detects that the left stop switch 11sw is operated by the left stop switch 11sw when only the left reel 17a is rotating, the symbol position is “18”. To “table_L_04”. Then, “0” is acquired as the number of sliding frames. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 89 (c), the stop position of the left reel 17a is “18”.

  Thus, the player operates from the middle stop button 12 and aims at the symbol related to “Red 7”, so that the combination of symbols related to “Red 7 diagonally aligned replay 01” is aligned on the effective line. Then, “50” is set to the value of the AT state game number counter.

(Reel 17 stop mode when red 7 diagonally replay 03 is displayed)
Next, based on FIG. 90, the stop mode of the reel 17 at the time of displaying the red 7 replay 03 will be described.

  FIG. 90 is similar to FIG. 88 and FIG. 89, based on the fact that information related to the winning area “23” or “24” is stored by the game information storage process in step S302-2 in the Bonus preparation state. After the animation shown in FIG. 87 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46, the reel stop mode when the player operates the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 without following the information displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46. FIG.

  First, when the winning area “23” is determined by the internal lottery process, the main CPU 301 sets the stop table X as the stop table selection table by the process of step S111. 90A, when the main CPU 301 detects that the symbol position is “18” and the middle stop switch 12sw detects the operation of the middle stop button 12 in a state where the reels 17 are all rotating. , “Table_C — 14” is selected, and “0” is acquired as the number of sliding frames. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 90A, the stop position of the middle reel 17b is “18”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (b), the main CPU 301 stops at the right position when the symbol position is "18" while the left reel 17a and the right reel 17c are rotating and the middle reel 17b is stopped. When the switch 13sw detects the operation of the right stop button 13, “table_R_3” is set. Then, “0” is acquired as the number of sliding frames. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 90 (b), the stop position of the middle reel 17b is “18”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 90C, the main CPU 301 detects that the left stop switch 11sw detects the operation of the left stop button 11 when the symbol position is “17” while only the left reel 17a is rotating. To “table_L_04”. Then, “3” is acquired as the number of sliding frames. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 90 (c), the stop position of the left reel 17a is "20".

  In this way, the player operates from the middle stop button 12 and aims at the symbol related to “Red 7”, thereby aiming at the combination of symbols related to “Red 7 diagonally aligned replay 01”. , 13 is operated, but the symbol combination related to “Red 7 diagonally aligned replay 01” is not displayed, and the symbol combination related to “Red 7 diagonally aligned replay 03” is aligned on the effective line, and is used for the AT state. “30” is set to the value of the game number counter.

  In addition, as shown in the number of sliding frames defined in “table_L_04”, the symbol combination related to “Red 7 diagonally aligned replay 01” indicates that the left stop button 11 is pressed when the symbol position of the left reel 17a is “18”. If you do not operate it will not be complete. Therefore, an advanced person who is excellent in the pressing technique, by aligning the symbol combination related to “Red 7 diagonally aligned replay 01”, compared to the case where the symbol combination related to “Blue 7 middle aligned replay” is aligned. Since a large value of “10” game is set in the AT state game number counter, the interest for the game is improved for the advanced player.

  In addition, as described above, when the symbol position of the left reel 17a is “18”, the left stop button 11 is not operated unless it is operated. In some cases, the symbol combinations related to “7 diagonally aligned replay 01” cannot be aligned. Therefore, a beginner who does not have a good pressing technique can make a combination of symbols related to “Blue 7 Middle Level Replay” by comparing the combinations of symbols other than “Red 7 diagonally aligned Replay 01”. Since a large value of “10” games is set in the AT state game number counter, the beginner can be rescued.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the information related to the character B is stored in the state where the information related to the character A is stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405. In such a case, control is performed to erase information related to the character A and to store information related to the character F. Thereby, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which a privilege given to a player does not become monotonous.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 402 creates a map by map creation processing, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, information relating to a map stored in advance in the sub ROM 404 may be used. This eliminates the need for a process for creating a map, thereby reducing the processing load on the sub-control board 400.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 402 determines the value of the progress mass counter provided in the sub RAM 405 every time the symbol combination related to “normal replay” is displayed on the active line in the normal replay display process. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the updated value of the progress mass counter provided in the sub RAM 405 may be determined by lottery, or the value of the progress mass counter provided in the sub RAM 405 is updated in a predetermined order. Also good. As a result, the updated value of the progress mass counter provided in the sub RAM 405 becomes irregular, which can give the player an unexpected feeling.

  In this embodiment, the normal state map creation table, the chance state map creation table, the AT state map creation table, the added state A map creation table, the stage lottery table, the chance mass stop lottery table, and the battle The lottery values defined for each character in the mass stoppage lottery table constitute the privilege defining means of the present application.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 402 that executes the character acquisition lottery process based on the character acquisition lottery table constitutes the privilege determining means of the present application.

  Note that in the present embodiment, the privilege information storage unit of the present application is configured to execute the process of storing the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405 and the information related to the acquired character in the character information storage area.

  In the present embodiment, the map creation process, the chance mass stop process, and the battle mass stop process are executed based on information related to the character stored in the character information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405. The sub-control board 400 constitutes a privilege granting unit of the present application.

  In the present embodiment, the reel 17, the display window 21, and the stepping motors 101, 102, and 103 constitute the symbol display means of the present application.

  In the present embodiment, the start lever 10 and the start switch 10sw constitute start operation detection means of the present application.

  In the present embodiment, the main control board 300 that executes the internal lottery process constitutes the winning combination determining means of the present application.

  Moreover, according to this embodiment, although the game machine used for a spinning-reel game machine (slot machine) was demonstrated, you may use for a pachinko game machine, a sparrow ball game machine, and an arrange ball game machine.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Game machine 2 Cabinet 2a Hinge mechanism 3 Front door 4 Keyhole 5a, 5b Side lamp 6 Medal slot 7 1BET button 7sw 1BET switch 8 MAX-BET button 8sw MAX-BET switch 9 Settlement button 9sw Settlement switch 10 Start lever 10sw Start switch 11 left stop button 11sw left stop switch 12 middle stop button 12sw middle stop switch 13 right stop button 13sw right stop switch 14 stop button unit 15 return button 16 selector 16s medal sensor 17a left reel 17b middle reel 17c right reel 17d reel unit 18 Button 18sw Production button detection switch 19 Cross key 19sw Cross key detection switch 20 Panel 21 Display windows 22a to 22j Production lamp 23 Start lamp 24a -24c BET lamp 25 Stored number display device 26a-26b Game status display lamp 27 Discharged number display device 28 Receivable display lamp 29 Replay display lamp 30a-30c Stop operation sequence display lamp 31 Lumbar panel 32 Sauce unit 33 Medal payout port 34a , 34b Lower speaker 35a, 35b Upper speaker 36 Setting display section 37 Setting change button 37sw Setting change switch 38 External concentration terminal board 39s Selector sensor 40s Reset key sensor 41s Door open sensor 42 Start lever effect lamp 43 Drive board 44 Effect device 45 General-purpose board 46 Liquid crystal display device 100 Reel control boards 101-103 Stepping motor 111s Left reel sensor 112s Middle reel sensor 113s Right reel sensor 200 Relay board 300 Main control board 30 1 Main CPU
302 Main ROM
303 Main RAM
304 Random number generator 305 I / F circuit 400 Sub control board 401 I / F circuit 402 Sub CPU
403 Random number generator 404 Sub ROM
405 Sub RAM
406 RTC device 410 Production control board 420 Image control unit 421 VDP
422 Liquid crystal control CPU
423 LCD control ROM
424 Liquid crystal control RAM
425 frame counter 426 CGROM
427 VRAM
428 Sound source IC
429 Sound source ROM
430 Lamp Control Unit 431 Lamp Control CPU
432 Lamp control ROM
433 Lamp control RAM
440 Amplifier control board 441 Lower speaker amplifier 442 Upper speaker amplifier 500 Power board 510 Power supply 511 Power button 511sw Power switch 520 Hopper 521 Discharge slit 522 Hopper guide member 523 Guide member 524 Discharge guide member 530 Auxiliary reservoir 530s Auxiliary reservoir Full sensor 601 Stage display area 602 Character display area 603 Map display area 604 Progression mass display area

In order to solve such a problem, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of executing a game using a game medium, and a plurality of benefits relating to the acquisition of the game medium A privilege determining means for determining the privilege to be given to the player based on the means, a privilege storing means for storing the privilege determined by the privilege determining means, and the privilege storage means. A privilege granting unit that grants the privilege to a player based on the privilege stored in the game, wherein the privilege determining unit stores the first privilege in the privilege storage unit in, by the privilege determining means, as the benefits given to the player, if the second award different from the first award is determined, the first award and said second privilege wherein said Compared to the first award or the second privilege determines a third benefits favorable to the player in the winning of the game media, the privilege storage means by the privilege determining means, said third benefits Based on the determination, the third privilege is stored.

Claims (2)

Privilege provision means in which a plurality of benefits are defined;
Privilege determining means for determining the privilege to be given to the player based on the privilege defining means;
Privilege storage means for storing the privilege determined by the privilege determination means;
Privilege granting means for granting the privilege to a player based on the privilege stored in the privilege storage means;
With
The privilege determining means includes
In a state where the first privilege is stored by the privilege storage unit, the second privilege different from the first privilege is determined as the privilege to be given to the player by the privilege determination unit. A third privilege different from the first privilege and the second privilege,
The privilege storage means is
A gaming machine, wherein the third privilege is stored based on the third privilege being determined by the privilege determining means. A symbol display means for variably displaying and stopping a plurality of symbols;
Start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by the player;
A winning combination determining means for determining a winning combination based on the detection of the start operation;
Further comprising
The privilege determining means includes
2. The game according to claim 1, wherein when a specific winning combination is determined by the winning combination determining means, the bonus to be given to the player is determined based on the privilege defining means. Machine.